Home

2015 FIAT 500L Owner`s Manual

1. CONTENTS B MIRRORS eseeee n BR 92 RearSeatS cerpin RR ETE eeu SS 102 Inside Day Night Mirror 92 Head Restraints 0 00000 5 106 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 93 Bl OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD 110 Conversation Mirror If Equipped 94 E LIGHTS oues wae KGS RAS kw eas ovi 112 Power Mirrors 0 lese 95 Multifunction Lever sese 112 Folding Mirrors llle 95 Headlights 4 22 305 600808 AERE ERE 113 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 96 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 114 SUM VISOIS ork ed ag he Fada gee end 96 Hiph Beams x ss oy ta ae ae hohe be Dd pes 114 EALS 33 35593 PU per FOSS eR eR 97 O Hash To Pass lessen 114 FLOM Seats 2 rs lere Pee dae ea a e aee 97 Parking Lights 224 0644 seus ese res 114 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Interior Lights E WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Front Windshield Wiper Operation Rear Window Wiper Washer E TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN Lane Change Assist Follow Me Home Headlight Delay Front Fog Lights If Equipped Tum Signals 2 6 xg mem eem ll ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL To Activate To Deactivate To Set A Desired Speed 0 0 0 119 119 122 123 124 125 12
2. 0 00 Electronic Brake Control System Brake Assist System Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 124 Electronic Stability Control ESC 265 428 INDEX EN Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 135 180 Exit TPs iussi o eee x t a Re ra 185 Start Of Trip Procedure 0 185 Emergency Deck Lid Release 29 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher 313 Jacking 4 4 oec he Mada ede ER RR 328 Jump Starting liie eee 336 TOWING iuis dept der ma Den ated der Cf e gs 343 Emergency Trunk Release 56 29 Engine Air Cleaner i esa cede rb RE Eae 356 Break In Recommendations 82 Checking Oil Level argiei iag n 00005 354 Compartment oarpen eaa p hnn e a eee 351 COOUNS sader artia d E pada gang ad e 369 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 84 305 Fails to Starb aget uS E e See a 231 Flooded Starting i sse e 231 Fuel Requirements serpan emen Rene 302 Oll ids eh Pe irtani e heo ded Eres 354 400 Oil Filler Cap a cies eee instama ea 355 Oil Filter iix bbw ew PR Eg 356 Oil Sel cti n a edere ERU a deer RR Ra 355 OverheaUng ies eda bp edad e RES E 313 Starting ssec s e e e db nr eyed 229 Temperature Gatge se ana set muaya aee eee 169 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 55 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission 224 236 352 Fluid Type 22s
3. llle 342 Shoulder Belts llle 35 Signals TUIN ceu aces prse oe e EROR A See d RA 87 Snow Chains Tire Chains 294 SNOW Tires e a4 4 bd as aa Cache a Saeed XM Y E 286 Spare De sco sos seh cee a eee LE aes 288 289 Spark Plugs s ee re eR ex e Rr Rs 401 Speed Control Cruise Control 124 169 Speedometer bus dpt Read Ee x e 169 436 INDEX M Star ng eue ee awe Rem e x dec Pace a 229 Automatic Transmission 229 Cold Weather siis eds sk n a n 230 Engine Fails to Start 0000000 231 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission 229 Manual Transmission len 229 Steering Tilt Colum ia bea esce Rs 123 Wheel Tilt 22a ene Oe eRe GTC Yo 123 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 192 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 192 StOTage uci bE SEG og me P hx mE Eas 394 Storage Vehicles asses e e RR 394 Storing Your Vehicle lille 394 St ck Freeing ess eR e be RR 341 SUN ROOK ccce renes hec inte LE ERR 147 Suri Visor Extension ses e aaa ee eae a 96 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 45 Tachometer sreca temea ew rae eva et 169 Telescoping Steering Column 123 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 169 Tilt Steering Column 00000005 123 Tire and Loading Information Placard 276 277 Tire Markings du sre ard oe tae rre RR ae 269 ju
4. The power outlet is located on the central tunnel in front of the shift lever between the two cup holders It only operates with the ignition key at MAR ON On models with optional smoker s kit the cigar lighter takes the place of the power socket see Cigar lighter paragraph AER Passenger Compartment Power Socket NOTE Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W to the socket Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED WARNING This is located on the central tunnel next to the parking brake lever To activate the cigar lighter push and release the When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot knob After a few seconds the knob automatically returns to To avoid serious injury handle the cigar lighter with its initial position and the cigar lighter is ready for use care Always check that the cigar lighter has turned ENS a off NOTE e Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W to the socket Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors Cigar Lighter If Equipped 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS For the rear seat passengers their is one cupholder For the driver and front passenger cupholders are lo peated DV Ahe ceter PODES cated on the floor console between the front seats
5. llle 269 Safety TIPS Jers ae tee downs ea med DIRE tooo eed 83 Schedule Maintenance 0000008 406 Seat Belt Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 42 Energy Management Feature 41 en INDEX 435 Lap Shoulder Belts s ciaee cusa iman aeea 35 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting 40 Pregnant Women osos ee o e ees 40 Seat Belt Pretensioner llle 41 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 00 002 eee 33 Seat Belt System es ges eee A 31 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 00002 eee 388 Seat Belt Reminder 00000 cee eae 33 Seat Bells 4e dO RERO OR CATENA 32 85 Child Restraint 2 0 00 0000 eraa eae 61 Front Seat 22er bea edu dee tee 32 35 38 Inspection aser reret see ees gt EG 85 Operating Instructions 38 Pregnant Women socne sisii ka mebran 40 PretenslOners 4 52626564454 neake t Eudain 41 RearSeat zsead eR gee aiet daa Ea 35 Untwisting Procedure 00004 40 Seats Fold and Tumble Rear 04 103 Reclining 2er e e ee oem See aa 99 Security Alarm as dora esce e Ree ada 15 SENTRY KEY FCC General Information 04 14 Sentry Key Immobilizer 13 Service Assistance 2l 415 Service Contract 22e llle 417 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 169 Service Man alS 21 2 e a yay d 419 Service Reminder Indicator llus 169 Shift Lever Override
6. o o o 9 e e e c c c e e oic e eo e e S e S S g A Q e i5 e N co o Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o lololol e e e e e e e e zg8g8 25 2 8 8 8 2 28 8 N co s e de o o0 000 r 2 9 amp R SNI a amp Inspect and replace PCV valve if X necessary Replace the timing belt X The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EE WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Prepare A List Be Reasonable With Requests ll IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE FIAT Customer Center FIAT Canada Customer Center Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY Service Contract E WARRANTY INFORMATION ll REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C l
7. 169 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 169 Traction Control 2 eaaa e ERR 266 Turn Signal 4 ia bec der E ders 87 169 W it to Start e uda 20214004 RR eed x es 169 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 169 Loading Vehicle Tires os hago ts whats ides ae x don eoe D hiner ss 276 Locks Child Protection isse o e 24 DOON Eia re S act e eR a ee a Cs 21 Lubrication Body eee 362 dg INUtSa aaah Gongs ped feb goes Ee ae dot ego 314 Maintenance Free Battety lt o escasa sas seama ass 357 Maintenance General 00005 169 353 Maintenance Procedures nannaa auaa aaa 353 Maintenance Schedule nnana naana aaa 406 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 169 Manual Service lll ees 419 Manual Transmission lieu 232 377 Fluid Level Check oonan 0 0 0 0 eee nee 378 Frequency of Fluid Change 378 Lubricant Selection 00005 377 403 Master Cylinder Brakes 000040 375 MBEZEOIS axe Shae bw sales a og eee do bes 92 Automatic Dimming llle 93 Electric Powered 1 0 0 0 eee ee 95 Electric Remote 0 0 000 cee eae 95 Heated eee 96 R arvieW x leuensc mre 6 Rex eee S ESSE ea Nep e P Rd 92 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 296 Multi Function Control Lever 0 113 ee INDEX 433 New Vehicle Break In
8. 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per formance and damage the emissions control sys tem Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition WARNING malfuncti
9. Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts Ad vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Ad vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes The air
10. Handle 2 Platform 2 Place the desired objects in compartment 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Load Compartment 3 Then reposition the platform correctly in the housings on the side panels and rear crossmember Platform Housings 1 Front Locations 2 Rear Locations NOTE Movements of the load platform must take place in a central position relative to the luggage compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Moving the load platform To move the load platform from lower to upper position proceed as follows 1 Grip handle and raise the platform holding it with one hand Load Platform 1 Handle 2 Platform 2 Position the platform correctly on housing on the side panels 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Securing Your Load There are two tie downs inside the luggage compartment for attaching cables which can secure the load carried A further two tie downs located on the rear crossmember n Q Raised Position 1 Front Housing Locations 2 Rear Housing Locations 3 m Cargo Tie Down Locations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Two hooks are also available on the side panels to fix loads which are not excessively heavy e g bags To use Seen the hooks push the release button The maximum load admitted per each bag hook is 22 Ibs 10 kg Cargo Side Panel Hook Locations 1
11. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems FCA US LLC 15BF 126 AC li Third Edition Printed in U S A
12. Phonebook Recent Calls Dial Messaging Settings Uconnect 6 5A 6 5AN Phone 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME TIP To start a POI search push the VR button t VR Voice Text Reply pee DES Pays sind males Cole oP Uconnect will announce incoming text messages Push 68 AMomentof _10 10 out the Phone button wand say Listen Must have W Elizabeth St compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect sys tem 1 Once an incoming text message is read to you push the Phone button After the beep say Reply 2 Listen to the Uconnect prompts After the beep repeat one of the pre defined messages and follow the UMIT system prompts E ED ys n a Options Uconnect 6 5A 6 5AN Navigation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 PRE DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Yes Stuck in Traffic See you later No Start without Til be Late me Okay Where are you I will be Call Are you there lt number gt an ee yet minutes late I ll call you I need See you in later directions number of I m on my way Can t talk right minutes I m lost now Thanks TIP Your mobile phone must have the full implementa tion of the Message Access Profile MAP to take advan tage of this feature For details about MAP visit UconnectPhone com Apple iPhone iOS6 or later sup ports reading incoming text messages only Additional Informatio
13. Rear Cupholder Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 STORAGE Glove Compartment Your vehicle is equipped with a upper and lower glove compartment which is located on the right side of the instrument panel Push the latch button upward on the upper glove compartment door to open it Pull outward on the lower glove compartment latch to open the lower glove compartment Push the upper glove compartment door down to close it and the lower glove compartment door upward to close it Upper And Lower Glove Compartments 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Glove Compartment Storage Front Center Armrest Storage If Equipped The front center armrest contains a storage compartment To open the storage compartment push in the upper release latch on the front of the armrest Armrest Upper Release Latch Lift upward on the armrest to gain access to the storage area ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 The front center armrest can also be lifted up and REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES adjusted in three positions this is done by pulling up on the armrest push the latch down to adjust the armrest down The car features a load platform which can be adjusted to three different heights permitting modular luggage com partment volume Position 1 platform completely lowered permits maximum luggage compartment capacity Position 2 platform at threshold level p
14. Release Button 2 Hook 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Storage Compartments There are two storage compartments located on the rear side panels Storage Compartment REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster ste The rear window defroster button is located with the climate controls on the instrument panel Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes To manually shut the defroster off push the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear d window defroster only when the engine is operating ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 CAUTION ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 110 lbs 50 kg and should be EE uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth Their are two attachment points inside the door jambs and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the that the Roof Rack crossbars attach to heating elements Labels can
15. F 30 C and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used An externally powered electric engine block heater is available as a factory installed option The message plug in engine heater will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5 F 15 C at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start NOTE Use of the recommended SAE 5W 40 Synthetic oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfac tory starting in cold conditions Extended Park Starting NOTE Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days 1 Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle 2 Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts ee STARTING AND OPERATING 231 3 If the engine fails to start within ten seconds cycle the If Engine Fails To Start ignition to the STOP OFF LOCK position wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool then repeat the WARNING Extended Park Starting procedure EE Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the 4 If the engine fails to start after eight attempts allow throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes the
16. Gear Oil Use only MOPAR C Series Manual amp Dual Dry Clutch Equipped Transmission Fluid or equivalent Control system Use only MOPAR C Series DDCT SAE 75W Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Automatic Transmission Aisin F21 Use only MOPAR AW 1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent 250 HD Transmission If Equipped Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 4 If DOT 4 brake fluid is not available then DOT 3 is acceptable MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 406 Maintenance Chart sees 408 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate in the instrument clus ter This means that service is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the Change Oil or Oil Change Re quired message is displayed Severe Operating Condi tions can cause the cha
17. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public trans portation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improve ments to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manu factured Copyright O 2015 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTIRODUCTION 45 3 532 n ure R
18. en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract tha
19. tal Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product under high pressure To avoid risk of personal The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant service be performed by authorized dealer using recov or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected ery and recycling equipment should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE A C Air Filter SS Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal inj may result perating or p jury may resu oS The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind P I Spe Ls the glove box Perform the following procedure to re A D 7 place the filter Ly p Agi A m y rj A C Air Filter Access Door 5 Open the air filter access door 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door 3 Pivot the glove compartment downward 4 Disengage the retaining tabs that secure the air filter access door to the HVAC housing MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 E YAS Ji f FAN FA HA pip T plis Fa pj 3 al jj Y PU HEX A C Air Filte
20. 400 426 INDEX MM Chains Tires gy seca oe re wi ac ede X S 294 Changing A Flat Tite pereat coeno Bae eas 328 Chart Dre Sizing 04 5 23 terda a2 4 de eta LER 271 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 169 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 83 CHECKS Safety icc zogen cep e oie ees as ag ahaha 83 Child Restraint 225 3 odo ace Ped dedo ae ed 61 Child Restraints Booster Seats veda ap a E cad 65 Child Restraints 2 0 0 0 000 cee eee ae 61 Child Seat Installation 00 4 79 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt 75 Infants And Child Restraints 63 Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 74 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Deltozscoiseerzeedeumerssa awe nes yd Eds 76 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children 68 Older Children And Child Restraints 64 Seating POsitIONS ia kac eren aura yd 67 Child Safety Locks zs seu chee de ee dw 24 Cigar Lighter i2 ed aore kid ER era Reis 151 Clean Air Gasoline llle 303 Cleaning Wheels sands ed ese EES Race E RE EA 384 Windshield Wiper Blades suus 363 Climate Control secs sess llli eee 194 Manual Y RRSERP eee ee ES 194 Cl tchi 4 007 ge RUE teats toe ed ns 375 Clutch Fluid cio eee Se Ree ee 375 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 193 Compact Spare Tire 2 288 Connector UCI i i prx ve eee a eee d gus 191 Universal Consume
21. Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 pressure within 15 minutes The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn off the Tire Service Kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Ve hicle CAUTION The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully e Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Servi
22. Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
23. Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated rear window over the heating filaments to avoid damage that might cause them to stop working properly 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Switching Off The Climate Control System Push the On Off button With climate control system off air recirculation is on thus isolating the passenger compartment from the outside e the compressor is off the fan is off e the heated rear window can be activated deacti vated NOTE The climate control system control unit stores the temperatures set before the system was switched off and restores them when any button of the system is pushed except for the A C Control button To restart the climate control system in fully automatic mode push the AUTO button Additional Heater If Equipped This allows the passenger compartment to be heated more quickly in cold weather conditions The heater switches off automatically when the required comfort conditions are achieved The additional heater activates automatically depending on the environmental conditions and with engine started NOTE The heater only operates if the outside tempera ture and engine coolant temperature are low The heater will not activate if the battery voltage is too low ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Uconnect VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Key Features Introducing Uconnect amp e 5 0 inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM FM
24. Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indica tion of the distance between the rear fascia bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to the Park Assist System Usage Precautions for the limitations of this system and recommendations Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE As the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases the au dible alert becomes more frequent Interaction With Trailer Towing The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle The system will be automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles in the horizontal direction from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 55 in 140 cm from the center of the rear fascia bumper and up to 24 in 60 cm from the comers of the rear fascia bumper depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle If several obstacles are detected the Rear Park Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle
25. If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will perma nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 CAUTION For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPARG Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended mild soap solutio
26. Push MENU to confirm selection NOTE Selection is possible between 20 125 mph or 32 201 km h depending on the selected unit The setting will increase decrease by five units each time the UP DOWN button is pushed Push and hold the UP DOWN button to increase decrease the setting rapidly Save the setting by briefly pushing the button when you approach the required setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings To cancel the setting proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button On will flash on the display 2 Push and release the DOWN V button Off will flash on the display 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Dimmer NOTE The brightness of IPC will change automatically only if the External light has changed External light On Night Mode External Light OFF Day Mode In both case Day or Night is possible to adjust the display brightness as described in step 1 below 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To adjust the brightness proceed as follows Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button to 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button On or 1 set the required
27. Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these DEP plactoorn helpful quick tips It provides the key Voice Commands Bluetooth with integrated voice control and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5 0 Gps navigation if equipped or 6 5A 6 5AN system p 10 10 oval 54 A T8 E 401 9 105 1 gt AM nett 91 7 a alates WUOM sxm T lrowse lt lt ii Tune gt Audi RADIO MEDIA NAV PHONE MORE Uconnect 6 5AN Uconnect amp 5 0N 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Key Features e 6 5 inch Color Touchscreen Display with AM FM USB SD Card Bluetooth Bluetooth with integrated voice control GPS navigation if equipped Get Started All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel T Visit UconnectPhone com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions Reduce background noise Wind and passenger con versations are examples of noise that may impact recognition 3 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver Each time you give a Voice Command you must first push either the VR or Phone button wait until after the beep then say your Voice Command You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and sayin
28. The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the car during the parking maneu ver Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission is placed into REVERSE an audible alert is activated The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the dis tance from the obstacle Pulses emitted in quick succes sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 in 30 cm away EEEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION Obstacle An obstacle is present within the Audible signal dashboard loudspeaker Distance sensors field of view e Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases Emits continuous tone at 12 in 30 cm e Adjustable volume level Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Visual signal EVIC Arcs are shown based on the obstacle s distance and location relative to the vehicle Refer to Rear Park Assist Display for further information Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Sig
29. for signs of contamination i e conditions fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to CAUTION Continued operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE When turning the ignition key quickly full power steering functionality can be achieved after a few sec Continued onds 258 STARTING AND OPERATING PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the side button with your thumb then lower the lever completely A 1 Parking Brake Release Button 2 Parking Brake Lever When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the MAR ACC ON RUN position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels
30. tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision Positioning The Lap Belt Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal if any slack so that it is comfort able and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 0226075266 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for them and
31. 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or e Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades E YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 421 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on s
32. 650 lbs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 eee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 Ibs Weight 865 Ibs af 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs minus 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs minus 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and incre
33. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Conversation Mirror If Equipped To gain access to the conversation mirror pull downward There is a conversation mirror located at the top of the BOIS Durar o Me open pasihan overhead console Conversation Mirror Conversation Mirror Location es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel To adjust a mirror turn the control knob toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror Power Mirror Controls Folding Mirrors The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage The mirror has three detent positions full forward normal and full rearward 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
34. Air flow to windshield and side windows ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Selecting the footwell windshield or only windshield distribution activates the climate control system com pressor LED on A C button on and the air recirculation is set to outside air LED on Recirculation Control button off This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows The user can always set air recirculation and climate control system compressor Additional Electric Heater If Equipped The additional electric heater ensures more rapid passen ger compartment heating It activates in cold weather conditions if the following conditions are verified e outside temperature low engine coolant temperature low engine on e fan speed set to Ist speed Temperature Control knob turned completely clock wise to red section The heater is switched off when at least one of the conditions above is no longer verified NOTE The power of the electric heater is modulated according to the battery voltage System Maintenance In winter the climate control system must be turned on at least once a month for about 10 minutes Have the system inspected at a Fiat dealership before the summer NOTE The system uses R 1234yf coolant which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leak age Under no circumstances is the use of R 134a allowed 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Automatic Dual
35. DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 b Rear Jacking Location NOTE There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body as indicated by the traingular lift point symbols on the sill molding 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange centering the jack saddle between the locating notches on the sill flange 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the wheel bolts and tire 7 Mount the spare tire CAUTION Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly NOTE For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use Spare under Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 8 Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel bolts EN
36. Deactivation Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Fog Lights If Equipped The fog light switch is located on the center ZO stack of the instrument panel just below the radio Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on Push the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off Interior Lights The interior light switches are located in the overhead console The interior lights can be set to three different positions Off Left Position Center Position On Right Position Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console push the switch to the on right position from its center position and the lights are always on On Right Position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Push the switch to the off left position from its center Leave the switch in the center position and the lights are position and the lights are always off turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed Off Left Position Center Position 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead CAUTION console controls the map or reading function of the lights Push the switch to the right to turn on the right light and Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the push the switch to the left to turn on the left light switch is in the c
37. Filling Procedure CAUTION TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Automatic Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Manual Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Ground Transmission Transmission Aisin F21 250 HD Transmission Flat Tow NONE Transmission in Transmission in NOT ALLOWED NEUTRAL NEUTRAL Dolly Tow Front OK OK OK Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK OK NOTE When recreationally towing your vehicle always follow applicable state and provincial laws Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly with the front wheels OFF the ground 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission or a Euro 4 Release the brake pedal only when the parking brake Twin Clutch transmission may be flat towed with all is applied or the vehicle is securely connected to a tow four wheels on the ground at any legal highway speed vehicle for any distance if the transmission is in NEUTRAL To place the Euro Twin Clutch transmission in NEU
38. Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Sun Visors The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner near the front windshield The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass Both sun visors are equipped with illuminated courtesy mirrors Sun Visor Driver Side Shown Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 To use the Slide On Rod feature rotate the sun visor SEATS downward and unclip it Pull the sun visor along the Slide On Rod until the sun visor is in the desired position Forward Rearward Adjustment Front Seats The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the desired position is reached Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Slide On Rod Feature 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adjusting Bar WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and
39. Pull outward on the negative battery cable terminal release lever to the open position 2 Lift up on the negative battery cable terminal and set aside Connecting The Jumper Cables 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the negative battery cable terminal of the discharged vehicle WARNING Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electri cal spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury Only use the specific ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 6 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the negative battery cable terminal of the vehicle with the discharged battery 2 Disconnect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable from the
40. S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F 5 C or if roads are covered with ice or snow For more informa tion contact an authorized dealer 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use Summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle WARNING Do not use Summer tires in snow ice conditions You could lose vehicle control resulting in severe injury or death Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi nal equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do s
41. The transmission driving clutch has overheated Pull over shift the trans SHIFT TO PARK WAIT TO COOL mission into PARK and allow the vehicle to cool until TRANS COOL READY TO DRIVE is displayed TRANSMISSION COOL READY The transmission has cooled down and the vehicle is OK to drive TO DRIVE ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 MESSAGE DESCRIPTION SERVICE TRANSMISSION A transmission fault has been detected See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service SERVICE A shift lever fault has been detected See your authorized dealer for diag nosis and service SET PARK BRAKE The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not functioning properly Engage the parking brake to ensure that the vehicle will not roll when in PARK Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode some gears will be unavailable The transmission will operate only in a certain select set of gears such as 1st 2nd 3rd and Reverse or 1st 3rd 5th and Reverse or 2nd 4th and 6th with no Reverse PARK and NEUTRAL will continue to be available The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission
42. U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Push the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use
43. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 WARNING e To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for proper lug nut torque If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Spare Tire Stowage Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut clockwise the flat tire must not be connected to the winch until effort becomes heavy and an audible click is heard indicating the winch is properly stowed Cover the flat tire with the Emergency Spare
44. affix stickers to the inside of the heated rear window over the heating filaments to avoid damage that might cause them to stop working properly 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Air Recirculation Push and release the Air Recirculation button so that the LED on the button switch is on to enter recirculation mode It is advisable to switch internal air recirculation on while standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted air Do not use the function for a long time particularly if there are many passengers on board to prevent the windows from misting up NOTE Internal air recirculation makes it possible to reach the required heating or cooling conditions more quickly depending on the mode selected Do not use the internal air recirculation function on rainy cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the win dows misting Air Distribution Selection Rotate the Mode Control knob to manually select one of the five possible air distribution settings in the passenger compartment Air flow to the front rear footwell diffusers This air distribution allows the passenger compart ment to be heated quickly J P Air flow to the front windshield front side win dow and front rear footwell diffusers Air flow distributed between central and side dashboard vents and front rear footwell vents Air flow to central side dashboard vents passen ger s body
45. air temperature management E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Air Recirculation The Air Recirculation is managed according to the fol lowing operating logics e forced activation air recirculation always on indi cated by the LED on the Recirculation Control button forced deactivation air recirculation always off air intake from the outside signalled by the LED on the Recirculation Control button switching off Forced activation deactivation can be selected by push ing the Recirculation Control button When the On Off button is pushed the climate control system automatically activates internal air recirculation LED on Recirculation Control button on In automatic operation recirculation is managed auto matically by the system according to outside environ mental conditions NOTE The engagement of the recirculation system makes it possible to reach the required heating cooling condi tions faster It is however inadvisable to use it on rainy cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting up inside espe cially if the climate control system is off When the outside temperature is low recirculation is forced off air drawn in from the outside to prevent the win dows from misting up e t is inadvisable to use internal air recirculation when the outside temperature is low since the windows could mist up rapidly 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
46. and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h e Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates 296 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed E ES E _ S 5 055707139 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold tire pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or d
47. antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is ad equate With the engine off and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the MIN and MAX marks As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac tory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant f
48. as steel wool or scouring powder that will clear water scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals If the engine compartment is washed with an high pressure jet keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR 20 centimeters from filler surface Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPARO Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner
49. bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts pretensioners and Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags 1 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats The SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats sth Front Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts and or vehicle rollover events in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
50. be considered a normal part of the break in and riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously not interpreted as a problem injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your SAFETY TIES vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Transporting Passengers belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat belt properly 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area f you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of th
51. be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ATTEN Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the SS vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack Roof Rack Attachment Points Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 167 Trip Computer M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 00 168 Trip Buttons vas des Rev ever aes ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 169 Trip Functions sees 186 ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION Val es Display d sge srias cosas Taa dws 186 CENTER EVIC onoo rat cire 180 E T EVIC Scree 22 enn beg oR Ree 180 Features s rekurenta Rb oe eo bd eges 187 EVIC Control Buttons 00 0 181 Mi Uconnect RADIOS 00 0 191 O Electro
52. brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion When shifting into PARK press the lock button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle E STARTING AND OPERATING 251 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Rec
53. by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 239 WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pres
54. can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully separate the shift lever bezel and boot assembly from the center console 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the shift lever override access hole at the right rear corner of the shift lever assembly and push and hold the override release lever down 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever boot Shift Lever Override WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE NOTE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designe
55. cap place Headlamp Sealing Cap Installation New Bulb Installation ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Front Turn Signal Parking And Daytime Running Lamps 1 Turn front wheels inboard to access upper cover in wheel liner 2 Open the upper cover on the front of the wheel liner 3 Remove the cap from the back of the lower headlamp housing 4 Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove 5 nstall the bulb into socket and rotate bulb socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place 6 Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the wheel liner Front Fog Lamps To replace the front fog lights see your authorized dealer Front Rear Roof Lamps 1 Remove two screw and remove the lamp assembly 2 Remove the socket bulb by turning counterclockwise 3 Remove bulb and replace as needed 4 Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise to lock in place 5 Reinstall lamp Rear Tail Stop Backup And Turn Signal Lamps m j i 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the tail lamp access panel 3 Remove the two screws that secure the tail lamp to the body of the vehicle 4 Remove the tail lamp assembly 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Remove the two screws that secure the backplate to 8 Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out Seta ep Hansa 9 Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL This light is an LED assembly See your authorized dea
56. car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 WARNING WARNING Continued with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property dam A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc age Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and or disengaged e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho FUSES rized dealer If a general protection fuse for safety systems air WARNING bag system braking system power unit systems When replacing a blown fuse always use an ap engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer propriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse Continued 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Underhood Fuses The ID number of the electrical component
57. cesar n 9n 378 380 403 Gear Ranges nc cess eee hag Sea eee Ys 238 Event Data Recorder 00 000200000 60 Exhaust Gas Caution 0000048 84 305 Exhaust System 0 eee 84 367 Exterior Lights ias c dee hala Reh ase en 87 Filler Location Fuel llle 169 Filters Aur Cleaner a2 4 84 Sig 6 SA ddp S DO 356 Ait Conditioning sessie etary tee C ia 360 Engine Fuel csse eR EE 401 Engine Oe aana a euet unes e min ays 356 Engine Oil Disposal se rispada retenia es 356 Flashers Turn Signal eurn Satan tne d Us aeree qa aera 87 Flooded Engine Starting 0 231 Ehud Brake perrera iruga bean ed RR X Rn 403 Fluid Capacities 0 6 ee 400 Fluid Leaks iss 445 sa eae ed Sue Oo ges 87 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 381 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 401 Fog TCHS iad eut eh Bee ph ass accep ae talcs ek 116 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 0005 103 Freeing A Stuck Vehidle llle 341 Adding Additives 20 2 00 iee82 neck cede ee bas a Capacity Clean Alt iude I ererkwxd Poe RE Filler Cap Gas Cap Filler Door Gas Cap G soline ves ede d EI TREE ROI LIFE RS Ee Octane Rating Requirements Tank Capacity esed Re REGERE Fueling Garage Door Opener HomeLink Gasoline Clean Air llle 430 INDEX M Gasoline Fuel llle 302 400 Gasoline Reformulated llis 303 Gauges Coolant T
58. cycled to the OFF position When enabled active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN When enabled fixed guide lines are overlaid on the Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of image to illustrate the width of the vehicle the vehicle NOTE The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro The following table shows the approximate distances for grammable modes of operation that may be selected each zone through the Uconnect System Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual for further information Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are To avoid vehicle damage the
59. detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans mission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position it 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle
60. develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Transmission Shift Lever Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual STARTING AND OPERATING 247 shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information Moving the shift lever into the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position activates AutoStick mode providing manual shift control and displaying the cur rent gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc Toggling the shift lever forward or rearward while in the Autostick position will manually select the trans mission gear NOTE If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK REVERSE or NEUTRAL position when pushed for ward it is probably in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position In AutoStick mode the transmission gear 1 2 3 etc is displayed in the instrument cluster Move the shift lever to the right into the DRIVE D position for access to PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL 248 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the
61. ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Continued could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle If it s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball assembly mounted for a long period it is possible to filter out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in sensor field of view The filtering operation must be performed only by an authorized dealer PARKVIEWG REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen appears again If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned On the rear camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex ceeds 8 mph 13 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the vehicle s ignition is
62. electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle NOTE When having the Sentry Key amp Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au dible and visible signals the horn will pulse the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light on the instrument panel will flash To Arm The System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using e
63. have pro grammed in the radio preset button Player Operation Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the Player Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
64. information CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Continued CAUTION Continued Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant anti freeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 throughout the life of your vehicle need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Do not use water alo
65. km The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine running E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 NOTE The range depends on several factors driving style type of route freeway residential mountain roads etc conditions of use of the car load tire pressure etc Trip planning must take into account the above notes Distance Traveled This value shows the distance covered since the last reset Average Economy This value shows the approximate average consumption since the last reset Instant Economy This indicates the fuel consumption The value is con stantly updated The message will appear on the display if the car is parked with the engine running Average Speed This value shows the vehicle s average speed as a func tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset Travel Time This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Belt Buzzer Buzzer Activation For BeltAlert Indication This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group Automobiles Dealership has deactivated the BeltAlert system Refer to Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert in Occupant Restraints for further information To reactivate this function proceed as follows e Push and release the UP Nor DOWN V button briefly Off will flash on the display Push and release the or UP A or DOWN V button and On will app
66. maximum defogging e Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost The A C can be deselected manually without dis turbing the mode control selection 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 3 Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the 0 OFF position There are four blower speeds 4 AIC Button Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation modes at the same time ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired push the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature 5 Rear Defrost Control Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes 6 Mode Control Rotate this control to change the system between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Defrost e Panel J Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be ad justed to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so th
67. mode pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this position to inject the Tire oe Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant Hose clear hose 6 when selecting this mode WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the system Refer to Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement 0604018634 Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for infla
68. negative post of the booster battery 3 Disconnect the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 4 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle NOTE The negative battery cable must be connected to the negative post of the battery Follow these steps to connect the negative battery cable 1 Connect the negative battery terminal to the nega tive post of the battery 2 Push inward on the negative battery cable terminal release lever to the closed position If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE CAUTION Continued cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE w
69. of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide en hanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions simi lar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full Off mode Refer to Elec tronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel 264 STARTING AND OPERATING ME HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate Vehicle must be stopped e
70. of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 WARNING Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air c
71. of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes Occupants including children who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants including children should never lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the Side Air Bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Seat belts and child restraints where appropriate are necessary for your protection in all collisions They also help keep you in position away from inflating Side Air Bags To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child WARNING e Side Air Bags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING Continued e Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions Side Air Bags
72. oil and filter Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums and hoses Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Check and adjust hand brake Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Maintenance Chart i i ce e ce e e e Mileage or time passed e s82s s28s8 s8 2 2 2 9 S 9 s 3 whichever comesfirst Go o o Q e e gt c c 5 c c Ra o lv n o R S9 S 9 S9 SN amp 8 Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o o o o 2 S S S S S S S S 8 8 8 8 9 8 8 8 82 8 S 8 s S Noo 4cG dc N co t e Ka eN x e o x00 o0o r 2 zs2 2 amp 8 S8Si a amp Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints X X X X X Inspect front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and re X X X X X X X place if necessary Inspect the brake linings park ing brake function X X 5 X es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409 Mileage or time passed o o o o o o o Ss I 2 e 3 9 whichever comes firs 9 83818 818 838 8 83 eg eieeis c alal l s lR aalsa l glz ss Or Years 2 3
73. or fatal to you your passengers and others around you e Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing Continued Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respiratory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a phy sician immediately Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth imme diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M B Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit A Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve ste
74. position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 a N oo THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seatin
75. pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster an audible chime will be activated and the Check left or right front rear tire text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the up dated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected an audible chime will be activated and the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System text mes sage will display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault co
76. secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless headlight beam selection passing light and turn signals the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged NOTE The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON RUN position WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Multifunction Lever Headlight Operation Headlights NOTE When the headlights are turned on the Daytime Running Lights will be deactivated Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up ZO ward to the first detent for headlight operation 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Daytime Running Lights If Equipped To activate the Daytime Running Lights DRL rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol NOTE The low beams and side tail lights will not be on with DRL The DRL function can be turned on or off through the touchscreen Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual for further information High Beams Z With the low beams activated pull the multifunc tion lever towards the steering wheel to turn on the high beams Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to turn off the high beams Flash To Pass You can si
77. selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicl
78. self check when the ignition switch is first turned to the MAR ACC ON RUN position After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc tion is detected that could affect the air bag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the MAR ACC ON RUN position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to WARNING eight second interval Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint th
79. tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Continued 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IEEE CAUTION Continued Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flus
80. that the floor the seat adjusters have latched Rear Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Adjusting Bar UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Reclining Rear Seats WARNING The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion To adjust the seatback lift upward on the handle lean back on the seatback and when you reach Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest the desired position release the handle In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Fold And Tumble Rear Seat NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seats Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily Rear Seat Recliner Handle 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Seatback Folded 3 Locate the seatback recline lever on the outboard side Seatback Release Lever of the seat and lift upward on the lever 2 Fold the seatback forwa
81. the parking brake firmly and set an Euro Twin Clutch Transmission in PARK a manual transmis sion in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack 060505162 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked Continued 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic Games P seg 697 Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and wheel bolt wrench 2 If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the wheel bolts use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle 3 Before raising the vehicle use the wheel bolt wrench to loosen but not remove the wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the wheel bolts counter clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground Front Jacking Location AON ATA WHAT TO
82. the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Switchable Automatic Lockin
83. use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the
84. vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire e XL Extra load or reinforced tire or e LL Light load tire or e C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 EXAMPLE Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD
85. wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 054903773 1 US DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 5 Maximum Pressure 2 Size Designation 6 Treadwear Traction and 3 Service Description Temperature Grades 270 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Temporary high pressure com pact spare tires have the letter T or S mold
86. wiper lever is released Tilt Telescoping Control Handle 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN To unlock the steering column pull the control handle down To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle up until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 RES 3 CANCEL 2 ON OFF 4 SET UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and res
87. won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Side Impacts In side impacts the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection In side impacts the Side Air Bags deploy independently a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions including some collisions at certain angles or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy Rollover Events Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro priate based on the severity and type of collision Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover e
88. 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it between their neck and arm loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach WEENING Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the will not protect a child properly which may result in child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the serious injury or death A child must always wear child is using the lap shoulder belt check seat belt fit both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched correctly A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below
89. 378 380 Maintenances ise due nekea niedi ieia 378 380 Manuaal ate sca aera nae CT 232 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 138 Transporting Pels asco creron eee eee 82 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0 0 0 000 nanana 290 Trip Odometer iser sisi os m 169 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 2 eu cerra 29 Trunk Release Emergency 0 0005 29 Turn Signalsz ou iced v E cet Ae sce Nr Gs 169 UCI ConnectOf ss 2 4 tae RYE REY Een Uconnect Voice Command 0005 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 0 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector Universal Transmitter 438 INDEX ee Unleaded Gasoline ams m eem baw 302 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt Lis 40 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading a 32a ces e406 GUY edes 277 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Security Alarm Security Alarm 15 Vehicle Storage s c esed nssPeWe reg Pee 0363 394 Wait to Start Light ees 169 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 169 Warnings and Cautions 0006 7 Warranty Information llis 4 418 Washer Adding Fluid in seca Few mme 366 Washers Windshield 00 0000 119 Washing Vehicle gene BG ia ad Red 383 Water Driving Through i nee Re at as 256 Wheel and Wheel Trim llle 384 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care Ln 384 Wind Buffeting se css perdics
90. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o e oe e e 2 e 2 Q e e 8 88 88 8 8 8 8 8 S 8 S8 S8 S amp SF 38 8 2 8 82 5 98 amp R 83 Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter X X X X X Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X Replace Brake Fluid every two X X years Clean and lube sun roof tracks X X X X X X X X X X X X Replace spark plugs X X X X X 410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN Mileage or time pass colo o o o 2 o o o o ag p sed olo i oeoi e65 S S S S 2 2 e whichever comes first o o o 9 e e e c T T h o o eo o e o o e S e S Q Q E A e i5 e N co o Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o o9 o oe 8 S S S I S S S SS S Se elie ete le onl E e co t e e vjelja rr 9S a2 EIS R8I SN G amp Change the transmission fluid manual or Euro Twin Clutch if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing heavy loading taxi police delivery ser X X X vice commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or X X 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes first EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411 Mil r tim 2 S 2 2 e 2 eage or time passed 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 whichever comes first
91. 6 To Resume Speed oseas s oss esaa ai a aas 126 To Vary The Speed Setting 127 To Accelerate For Passing lle 128 REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED 129 Rear Park Assist Sensors 130 Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts 130 Failure Indications 00 132 Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System 133 Park Assist System Usage Precautions 133 ll PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED 6 6 23 5 04 2806 34 00 hi Rhen 135 ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 138 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 139 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Programming A Rolling Code 139 Mi CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED isse 151 Programming A Non Rolling Code 142 NM CUPHOEDERS coes BERE ans Oo 152 Canadian Gate Operator Programming M3 Ca STORAGE rosat naransan t toai i aia eat Rea Using HomeLink nananana aaa 145 Glove Compartment DeC EIly 6 945 Sup ees pikir ers EPa ansas 145 Front Center Armrest Storage If Equipped 154 Troubleshooting Tips 000 145 M REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES 155 General Information lees 146 Securing Your Load 0000 160 ll POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 147 Storag
92. 7 WINK OWS is peace hd paced Y eR Eun E 25 Power steering Fluid 3d ede eed 403 434 INDEX M Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 40 Preparation for Jacking ccs se ir ea lille 330 Pretensioners beat Belts z ic 2s sued ahead dwar eae a ee a d 41 Radial Ply Dres eese den cog Rer dese 284 Radio Operation sss is ced Re e ER Rn 194 Rear Camera 2 idiseuness ke 3 RREXTG SEE 135 Rear Liftgate Sedan 000 28 Rear Window Features 00 162 Reclining Rear Seats 2 0 uiderit sasa 103 Recorder Event Data 0 0000 cee eae 60 Recreational Towing scoe Sase eua sa Cotia 309 Reformulated Gasoline nuanua naana 303 Refrigerant see at n REEE eae em as hoon 359 Reminder Seat Belt llle 33 Remote Keyless Entry RKE FCC General Information 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 192 Replacement Bulbs 000000 394 Replacement Keys carei ek e cde oh e a s 14 Replacement Parts llle 352 Replacement Tires sesi amasa tat Dina Sama kaes 292 Reporting Safety Defects lt a crar llle 418 Restraints Child 0 0 ens 61 Restraints Occupant os sis gosea i mia taa a eee 31 Rotation Tires llle 295 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 85 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 87 Safety Defects Reporting llle 418 Safety Exhaust Gas su sse seeni Da n aa 84 Safety Information Tire
93. 7 5 Amp Brown Transmission F85 15 Amp Blue Front Power Outlet 12V F86 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet 12V F88 7 5 Amp Brown Heated Mirrors MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Interior Fuses Rear Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control The rear interior fuse panel is located on the driver s side Module BCM and is located on the driver s side under in the rear compartment the instrument panel m im Rear Fuse Panel Interior Fuse Panel 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service e g vacation for two weeks or more run the REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Bulb Number Overhead Lamp C5W Sun Visors C5W Courtesy Lamp W5W Glove Compartment C5W Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W Front Parking Daytime Running Lamps W21 5W Front Sid
94. AINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Transmission fluid is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc tion visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the ve hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid i
95. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the SAB deploys it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback s trim cover The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury 2 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs are located above the side windows The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG x Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts and or vehicle rollover events in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure The SABICs deploy downward covering the side win dows An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seate
96. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child restraint must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to Child Restraints should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 6 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 7 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 12 years or younger including a child in a rear 8 Do not lean against the door or window If your facing child restraint vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicl
97. CAUTION TRAL follow the procedure below DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a 1 Turn the key to the ON RUN position without start conventional automatic transmission Damage to ing the engine the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require _ towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the 2 Press the brake pedal and shift the transmission to ground NEUTRAL Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re 3 Turn the key to the OFF position The key will remain quirements can cause severe transmission damage in the ignition switch it cannot be removed since the Damage from improper towing is not covered un transmission is not in PARK Leave the key in the OFF der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty position while being towed WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 313 W JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF E IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 313 BQUIPPED gis matt hehehe wk eed 328 E WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Jack Location xs bs eae ER eR Ree SPECIFICATIONS zz ER aeons 314 Spare Tire Removal 000 Torque Specifications ss res etay pee oa 315 Preparations For Jacking E TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED 317 Jacking Instructions 331 Tire Service Kit Storage s sesa nesese sass 317 Spare Tire Stowage sss asesi esed ahanda 336 O Tire Service Kit Components And Operati
98. Ce gea dem 328 Jack Operation erered te kenti Y ERES 328 331 JUMP Starting issue aca erra dea C RORIS nas ad 336 Key In Reminder llle 13 Key Replacement sna a E 14 Keys eton dora e ee pd C Sanit de Mos ta 11 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 13 Lane Change and Turn Signals 169 Lane Change ASSISE aai a a aa i 115 Lap Shoulder Belts 5 cse m 35 Latches 350s a cena rer RS ER Er e 87 Lead Free Gasoline c x Re Rm Cea 302 Leaks ElU d 53 doc rete Re eee 87 IBS Miu EDT 291 Liftgate Sedan 4 2664s aay evenings Sandia 28 Light Bulbs 5 sy no etre gaunt nes 87 394 Lighter Cigaf s 222e49e 9 b das i 151 L15hi 22 Satan bb pde 87 112 113 Aubag rere ete ieee oS 58 85 169 Anti Lock ui widen pak Naw erre aa be 169 Brake Assist Warning llle 266 Brake Warning llle 169 Bulb Replacement 00000 396 Center Mounted Stop lille 400 Engine Temperature Warning 169 EXteriOr 22 339 k eG We nod Ra p ES REL PE 87 High Beam Indicator so ses eeu rni naer a 169 Low Fuel 20 ive bue erar rikane RECO 169 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 169 Oil Pressure 2 RR RR RET 169 c 114 PASSING se cere x aw bunk neneka ees 114 Seat Belt Reminder 00000 169 432 INDEX M Security Alam 4 vedo ene xe Ree a Rue as 15 DOLVICE icis he degens d anb Re nr ie ta 396 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator
99. Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 274 STARTING AND OPERATING M EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 HEEEEEC X XS STARTING AND OPERATING 275 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire infl
100. E 87 281 420 Aging Life of Tires 291 Jur Press fe s s ud E ER RR ed ds 281 Chains vo bee he otek eatin eu er bg ue 294 Changing dedu s eese ane ss ehem erae E an 328 CompactSpare llle 288 General Information less 281 High Speed ies stepdad pepe ad Ret a 284 Inflation Pressures llle 283 Jacking s os ode ots tope tos d totem Ded 328 Lite ot Gres oh est acere SE Rs ees 291 Load Capacity 3 oe dre ce e neies 276 277 Pressure Monitor System TPMS en INDEX 437 Pressure Warning Light e sa iess aei eteta ieii 169 Quality Grading sss dort karea ia nket 420 Radial 23 euch 230 e ale a E ions 284 Replacement serai hanst srati e e a 292 Rotation ea Shoe eie ER ERN P INS 295 Salfeby ei serene ep dure elas Ens 269 281 SIZES x3 dco ees n dE PSA Sg Bb NL war Res 271 Snow Tires ic cee ha dee Cee eR des 286 Spinning soe wees cule eee om EA ee es 290 Tread Wear Indicators llle 290 Tire Safety Information llle ss 269 Tire Service Kit llle 317 TOWING ces uisi Dele e ace aes Pane aedes 308 Disabled Vehicle llle 343 Recreational llle 309 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 309 TEACHOD esu dO ru ok rece R S Rr aub EUR RE SOROR 255 Traction COnDtEOl sse Ede a Rem eed a 263 Trailer TOWING d recede ah alk Brae iur dra 308 Transmission Automatic e veea ak e eee 234 246 380 Euro Twin Clutch era an ia ie a ai a 234 236 Jin e Sa Strays
101. ENU button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previously selected e Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the first submenu option Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button by single pushes to scroll through all the submenu options Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the displayed submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button by single pushes to select the new setting for this sub menu option Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the previously selected submenu option Push and release and hold the MENU button to return to the main menu short hold or the main screen longer hold Change Engine Oil Indicator System Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Engine Oil message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily push an
102. ER DCS sat ete diclitdeein diat d Locking Doors With A Key 005 jy EME KEYLESS ENTRY AERE erpen ias ts 18 Key In lgnition Reminder reran ain 13 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 19 B SENTRY KEYO isse 13 T Lock ne Dees Ana NE ate tee eee d Replacement Keys cec 14 Programming Additional Transmitters 19 NR MD 14 Request For Additional Remote Controls 19 WI VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM eese 15 Proc MD MM d MM SOS DREN Pde Se eines oN General Information isses 21 To Disarm The System 0004 16 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee B DOOR LOCKS zik pk YEUX 3S ER Bases 21 Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open 24 Auto Relocking Only For Rear Doors 24 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors 248 d HER REC REIS RR as 24 To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System sessu ras sae aa ss 24 E POWER WINDOWS toe accexciex dere es 25 Power Window Switches lesus 25 Wind Buffetng suce e re hy EE 28 B LIFIGATE dix E neers TEN S PARE 28 Liftgate Emergency Release 29 ll OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 31 Important Safety Precautions 31 Seat Belt Systems sies ek ein 32 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 45 Child Restrain
103. F Naty oan gn wg ego cse E qx 9 ARS HM s Am 7 OSON DLE COA amp COLMAR Bec Mmm numm vum ETT one JST sess INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owner s Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears engraved on the right front floor pan under the passenger seat on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B Pillar on the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or 7 death Stamped VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE E CONTENTS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 11 Central Lock Unlock Switch Safe Lock Ignition Switch 21s serss cerra 11 i TU
104. If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 12 High Beam Indicator ED This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam 13 Park Headlight ON Indicator Follow Me Home Headlight Delay Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on If the Follow Me Home feature is activated this indicator will illuminate and the Electronic Vehicle Information zb dz Center EVIC will show how long the function remains active For further information refer to Follow Me Home in Understanding The Features of Your Vehicle 14 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 15 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound When driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 16 Air Bag Warning Light e This light will
105. In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 246 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Six Speed Automatic Transmission Aisin F21 250 HD If Equipped The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal and the lock button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of PARK Refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will
106. LE 27 Auto Down The window switches have an Auto Down feature Push the window switch for approximately one second re lease and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Resetting The Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close t
107. Light BLINKS 6 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light Is ON SOLID Right Turn Light Is ON SOLID 7 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF Turn Signal Switch Must Be Placed In Neutral State Left Turn light Is OFF Right Turn Light is OFF 8 Turn Ignition OFF 9 Turn Hazard Flashers System is now reset and OFF Manually the engine may be started If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Air Bag Warning Light The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Occupant Re straint Controller ORC monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components eo ry The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV START or MAR ACC ON RUN position If the ignition switch is in the STOP OFF LOCK position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a
108. ME Climate Control System Compressor Push the A C Control button to activate deactivate the compressor activation is indicated by the LED on the button switching on The system remembers that the compressor has been switched off even after the engine has stopped When the compressor is switched off the system deacti vates air recirculation to prevent the windows from misting up Pushing the A C button will stop the AUTO MODE the AUTO LED will switch off To restore automatic control of compressor engagement push the AUTO button again NOTE With the compressor off air cannot be introduced to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower than the outside temperature Moreover under certain environmental conditions windows could mist rapidly since the air is not dehumidified Rapid Window Demisting MAX DEF function Push the MAX DEF button to activate LED on button on the windshield and side window demisting function The climate control system carries out the following operations switches on the air conditioning compressor when environmental conditions are suitable e switches air recirculation off e sets fan speed according to the engine coolant tem perature e directs air flow to windshield and front side window diffusers e activates the heated rear window activates the heated windshield if equipped e displays the fan speed Blower Control Indicator LED lit es UNDERSTANDING YOUR I
109. N EMERGENCIES 317 TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Small punctures up to 1 4 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi mately 4 F 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 90 km h Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear trunk area on the left side Tire Service Kit Components 1 Sealant Bottle 5 Mode Select Knob 2 Deflation Button 6 Sealant Hose Clear 3 Pressure Gauge 7 Air Pump Hose Black 4 Power Button 8 Power Plug located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Power Button Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following Push and release the Power Button 4 once to symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode turn On the Tire Service Kit Push and release Selecting Air Mode the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit g Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to A this position for air pump operation only Use Using The Deflation Button the Black Air Pump Hose 7 when selecting Push the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air this
110. N position an intermittent chime will signal for a few seconds If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front seat passenger BeltAlert is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the AVV START or MAR RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un buckled the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled The driver should instruct all occu pants to buckle their seat belts Change Of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front seat passenger BeltAlert unbuckles their seat bel
111. NSTRUMENT PANEL 211 NOTE The Front Defrost Control MAX DEF function remains on for about three minutes from when the engine coolant reaches the appropriate temperature When the function is activated the LED on the AUTO button switches off With the function activated the only possible manual adjustments are adjusting the fan speed and turning the heated rear window off When the Recirculation Control Rear Defrost Control or AUTO buttons are pushed the climate control system will deactivate the Front Defrost MAX DEF function Selecting the footwell windshield or only windshield dis tribution activates the climate control system compressor LED on A C button on and the air recirculation is set to outside air intake LED on the recirculation button off This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows It is however always possible to manage air recirculation and the climate control system compressor manually Rear Window Defrosting Push the Rear Defrost button to activate heated rear window defrosting The effective activation of the function is indicated by the rear defrost warning light on the instrument panel switching ON This function switches OFF automatically after about 20 minutes or when the engine is turned OFF It is not switched on automatically the next time the engine is started If equipped push the rear defrost button to activate defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window NOTE
112. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accel erator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel bolts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for proper closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected The cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113. PLACEMENT BULBS 394 E BULB REPLACEMENT sense 396 Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 396 Front Turn Signal Parking And Daytime Runtung Lamps asa hes Gees ed ER are 399 Front Fog Lamps espers rimisi cus adduDa a 399 Front Rear Roof Lamps 399 Rear Tail Stop Backup And Turn Signal Lamps 44459 o ep RR Pag ias 399 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 400 E FLUID CAPACITIES igi adceca ce d deb Ere we 400 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS 00 0000 e eee eee 401 Enpine caes eid gel eR ER ed 401 Chassis Scc eie peas esa aeta a 403 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 1 Air Cleaner Filter 4 Battery 7 Coolant Pressure Cap 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Front Distribution Unit Fuses 8 Coolant Pressure Bottle 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 Oil Fill Cap 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and Euro Twin Clutch Transmission control systems When these s
114. Period 82 Occupant Restraints os secs sos solu ee aaa e 31 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 0 302 Odomieter iest kee EE URS C Rd es 169 TD iode eue SUP ene aaa as us 169 Oil Change Indicator llle sss 183 Oil Change Indicator Reset lesus 183 Oil Engine 5 cere ace E ena 354 400 401 Capacity rris bes aene en eem s 400 Change Interval llslllleeelsn 355 Checking 3 oz vitae BEXGESSa te eeu aues 354 Disposal bd egre herd erem 356 Fillet 4 aoa ese AMR He dex Eg Re 356 Filter Disposal io ser e eg aac 356 Materials Added to 2 0 eee eee 356 Recommendation llle 355 400 VISCOSILY ac doen bed 84 GP EEG Ba 355 Oil Filter Change i ee ut aaa eae ee ad 356 Oil Filter Selection e recaese iera eoeta ee 356 Onboard Diagnostic System ere rranek ars 352 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 138 Operating Precautions cisean tiat awa 352 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Overheating Engine 0 00 00 eee eee ee 313 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 419 Paint Care a cesta se Du kad ec EUR coe Arte ee 382 Parking Brake us ree pedore gs 258 ParkSense System Rear llle 129 Passing Light sese Rae 114 PtSi tue tari se aure Qc ect ey DA iue 82 Placard Tire and Loading Information 277 Power IMITIOIS 2c ceu ag eo hus S ac uate wag s ada 95 SUDEFOO s supe ade SoG A n RR md 14
115. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE a Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 TL 2 Place the ignition in the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold the Homelink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator fft will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid 5 Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Non Rolling Code To reprogra
116. System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal and the lock button on the shift lever must be pressed Six Speed Euro Twin Clutch Transmission If Equipped The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal and the lock button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive press the lock button on the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Transmission Shift Lever This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE if vehicle speed is above 6 mph 10 km h This safety feature helps protect your transmission from damage STARTING AND OPERATING 237 Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
117. Temperature Con trol zone of the passenger compartment The set temperatures are shown on the displays Push the SYNC button to align the air temperature between the two zones Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to return to the separate management of air temperatures in the two zones Turning the control knobs completely in one direction or the other activates the HI maximum heating or LO maximum cooling functions respectively 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM To deactivate these functions turn the temperature knob to the desired temperature Air Distribution Selection By pushing the Mode Control buttons Up Down Right arrows it is possible to set one of the seven possible air distributions manually Up Arrow Air flow to the windshield and front side window diffusers to defrost them Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting When the defrost mode is selected the blower will automatically default to medium high Right Arrow Air flow at central and side dashboard vents to ventilate the chest and the face during the hot season e Down Arrow Air flow to the front and rear footwell diffusers This air distribution setting heats the passen ger compartment most quickly giving a prompt sen sation of warmth Right Down Arrows Air flow distributed between footwell diffusers hotter air and central and side dashboa
118. The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 419 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas terca
119. Tire Bag and stow the flat tire into the trunk CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench extension tool only Use of air wrench or power tool may damage the winch JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jumpestarting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 Preparations For Jump Start WARNING The battery in your vehicle is located on the drivers side of the engine compartment e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batterie
120. UE RE S pa Eco a aca GE DE El Rare Pobre cid n e d OS RC S 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 cece eee I n 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee m n tn 89 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee 9 c rh 165 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 53 21 53 39 9er RACE ox e boe e ec eae iene ede end a eee A CR 225 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES cecce sho hero er eke ie 9 WIE We R3 RR REL LEUR OR E 311 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ss 4 1x6 EE UR eats doo e Roe edo Se Exe e PE dg Sale aes 349 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES siesena d eek A o9 Be ad SEE bee ADAC CN RU ey SS eae Se a ORC 405 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE eee e 9 eh 413 Em INDEX 55 13 xa Ree pu he Rew ak d Ro VR GHI cals wince PUERO Ud Rd a ashe de OE aE 2 race A ak Cra A 423 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS M INTRODUCTION 0000 4 Hi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 7 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 5 B VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 8 M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 7 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle Be as sured that it represents precision workmanship distinc tive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your ve
121. Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the RES button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de crease speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected speed unit of
122. Vehicle must be on a 5 grade or greater hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle in NEUTRAL manual transmission vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for brak ing the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Dynamic Steering Torque DST The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system with the electric power steering to increase the safety level of the whole car In critical situations understeering oversteering brak ing with different grip conditions through the DST function the ESC system controls the steering to imple ment an additional torque contribution on the steering wheel to suggest the most correct manoeuvre to the driver ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 The coordinated action of brakes and steering increases the safety and car control feeling NOTE The DST is a driving aid system
123. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF EQUIPPED WARNING Continued WARNING Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the The jack is designed to be used as a tool for vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body Jack Location under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get The spare tire jack is located in the rear cargo area under a raised vehicle take it to a service center underneath the cargo floor where it can be raised on a lift Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 e oe 0o Spare Tire Removal Jack Location 1 Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel 2 Jack 3 Jack Handle Spare Tire Location 4 Emergency Allen
124. Warning Light 58 Driver Knee Air Bag 1 ee ee 49 Enhanced Accident Response 55 Event Data Recorder EDR 60 If A Deployment Occurs 000 5 54 Knee Impact Bolsters 0004 48 Side Air Bags ca cacti ares mee seeing 49 Airbag Light lt lt ctacesdacaoweare was a 58 85 169 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 356 Air Conditioner Maintenance 358 Air Conditioning Filter llle 360 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 358 359 Air Conditioning System 000 358 Air Pressure Tires 2l 283 Alarm Security Alarm 0 0004 15 Alarm System Security Alarm 15 Alfa Twin Clutch Transmission Fluid Type orbe ERES 379 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 370 400 Capacities ius crar cach angi eee a na gs 400 Disposal s 2 bes st em ehe he Hed d 373 Anti Lock Brake System ABS lisse 260 Anti Lock Warning Light ills 169 Appearance Care o rccsiriecrseceri sesa ees 382 Arming System Security Alarm 15 Audio Systems Radio iles 191 Automatic Dimming Mirror 93 Automatic Transmission 234 246 380 382 Adding Fluid cs sre asec ad ke dea ele ae 381 382 ee INDEX 425 A tostiek foc see Seiad Saws he STR ely Pane 253 F
125. Zone Climate Control System 1 Driver Temperature Control dt Equipped Provides the driver with independent temperature con Controls trol Rotate adjustment knob to set desired temperature NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 2 Recirculation Control Push and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON NOTE e When in Defrost mode the Recirculation button will flash if pushed This indicates that you can not proceed to this mode due to fogging risk e When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation indicator is OFF the Recirculation is in AUTO mode If the Recirculation indicator is ON the Recirculation setting is manual and Recirculation is ON Automatic Temperature Controls ATC E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 3 Rear Defrost Control Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes 4 A C Control Push and release the A C Control Button to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into AUTO mode and the A C indicator will turn OFF 5 ON OFF Control Push and release this but
126. able is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the Continued CAUTION Continued battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 WARNING CAUTION Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf Warranty Information Book located on the DVD HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro for further warranty information fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmen The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
127. accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further informa tion Moving the shift lever into the Autostick position beside the DRIVE position activates Autostick mode providing manual shift control and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc Toggling the shift lever forward or rearward while in the Autostick position will manu ally select the transmission gear 238 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK REVERSE or NEUTRAL position when pushed for ward it is probably in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position In AutoStick mode the transmission gear 1 2 3 etc is displayed in the instrument cluster Move the shift lever to the right into the DRIVE D position for access to PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake
128. ack Either reapply the brake to hold the vehicle or press the accelerator to climb the hill Before and after the engine is started you may hear a hydraulic pump for a short period of time This noise is normal and will not damage the transmission When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 e During extremely cold temperatures the transmission will not operate if the oil temperature is 22 F 30 C or below Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmission in PARK in order to warm the fluid Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Instrument Cluster Messages Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur These messages are described below MESSAGE DESCRIPTION GEAR UNAVAILABLE In AutoStick mode the gear selected by the driver is not available due to a fault condition See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service SHIFT NOT ALLOWED The gear position requested by the driv
129. actory installed hydraulic master cylinder fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the reservoir brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See been in a tightly closed container Keep the master your local authorized dealer for service Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 WARNING Continued CAUTION cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall fluid Ina open container absorbs moisture from the clutch system performance Improper brake fluids air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in Manual Transmission If Equipped spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also Lubricant Selection damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informatio
130. ad Restraint in the The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to event of a collision and could result in serious their normal position following a rear impact If the injury or death Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealership immediately E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Rear Head Restraints The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re straints the outboard head restraints have two comfort positions while the central head restraint have to use in the raised position When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maxi mum visibility for the driver When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint has to be in the raised position NOTE If the center rear head restraints requires removal see your authorized dealer To raise the outboard head restraints pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraints push the adjustment button located at the base of the head re straint and push downward on the head restraint To remove the outboard head restraints raise it as far as itcan go then push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up To reinstall the head restraint put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward Then ES adjust it to the appropriate height WARNING A loose head restraint th
131. aintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for tur bocharged engines under all types of operating condi tions the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS 12991 Engine Oil Viscosity 1 4L Turbo Engine SAE Grade MOPAR SAE 5W 40 full synthetic engine oil is recom mended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing
132. an be switched on in differ ent ways it is advisable to push the AUTO button and turn the knobs to set the desired temperatures In this way the system operates completely automatically to adjust the temperature quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the passenger compartment It also manages the air recirculation function and the acti vation of the air conditioning compressor E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 During automatic operation you can change the set temperatures air distribution and fan speed at any time by using the relevant buttons or knobs the system will automatically change the settings to adjust to the new requirements During completely automatic operation AUTO varying the air flow and or distribution which are not dis played causes the AUTO function LED to disappear and the system to operate in MANUAL mode displaying both the flow and distribution requested When the compressor is deactivated the AUTO opera tion remains active only if the system can guarantee in car comfort Otherwise the system switches to MANUAL mode the set temperatures will flash on the display The fan speed is the same in all the zones of the passenger compartment Adjusting The Air Temperature Rotate the Driver Temperature Control or the Passenger Temperature Control dial clockwise or anti clockwise to adjust the air temperature in the front left Driver Tem perature Control or right Passenger
133. an cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended Prop erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im proved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 Ethanol Methyl Tert Butyl Ether MTBE and Ethyl Tret Butyl Ether ETBE Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E 85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol
134. and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the ESC system or TCS system become active 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously 5 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the Brake Warning Light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the brake system res ervoir BRAKE 0 The light will remain on until the cause is corrected If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF LOCK position to the ON RUN position The l
135. and does not replace the driver s actions while driving the car Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent all accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attenti
136. and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good condi o Install on Front Tires Only tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise Dueto limited clearance on a 205 55 R16 use reduced occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove size snow chains or traction devices with a maximum the damaged parts of the device before further use projection of 9 mm beyond the tire profile Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km WARNING Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Using tires of different size and type M S Snow Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction device manufacturer Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle e Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 CAUTION Continued These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc i aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tions on the method of installation operating tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow
137. apability the remaining system will still func tion However there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness You may notice increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake System Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason i e repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Con trol System TCS Hill Start Assist HSA Dynamic Steering Torque DST and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Four Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con ditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces E STARTING AND OPERATING 261 The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming nois
138. ar preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the wiper blade out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use Poor perfor mance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Service Position Strategy The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed in a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily changed To enable the Service Position Strategy the wipers must be in the Park posit
139. ar down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into th
140. ar one fixed and is equipped with an electrically operated sun blind The power sunroof and the power sun blind can be operated only with the ignition key turned to the ON RUN position The power sunroof and power sun blind switches are located in the overhead console Power Sunroof Switches 1 Power Sun Blind Switch 2 Power Sunroof Switch 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS To Open WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sun roof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Pull the power sunroof switch for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented posi tion Pull the power sunroof switch a second time for approximately one second and release the sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is cal
141. arasinca ra ns 28 149 Windows wad deg weed Gee eh eee S 25 POWOE 2 ara ay ea Gi als Bee PR ORE le a A 25 Windshield Defroster 005 85 197 Windshield Washers llle 119 Windshield Wiper Blades 00 363 Windshield Wipers 0 0 000000004 119 Wiper Blade Replacement 363 Wrench Service Indicator 0 005 169 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR
142. arning Lights 10 Storage Compartment 16 Ignition Switch 5 Windshield Wiper Washer Trip Computer 11 Lower Glove Compartment 17 Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Horn 6 Central Air Vents 12 Upper Switch Bank 18 Electronic Speed Control Located On Steering Wheel 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour mph and or kilometers per hour km h 2 Cruise SET Indicator If Equipped refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing Your Instrument Panel 3 Electronic Stability Control OFF ESC OFF Indicator Light ESC This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con OFF trol system ESC has been turned off by the driver This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET For further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 4 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Mal function Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ESC Light in the instrument cluster will come on for four seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on con tinuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
143. as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem Unlock the power door locks ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM RESET PROCEDURE After the event occurs when the system is active a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV START or MAR ACC ON RUN to ignition STOP OFF LOCK Care fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine com partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights located in the instrument panel may both be blinking and will continue to blink In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure Customer Action Customer Will See 1 Turn Ignition OFF Turn Signal Switch Must Be Placed In Neutral State 2 Turn Ignition ON Left Turn Light Is OFF Right Turn Light BLINKS Right Turn Light Is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 3 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Customer Action Customer Will See Customer Action Customer Will See 4 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light Is ON SOLID Right Turn Signal Light BLINKS 5 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Right Turn Light Is ON SOLID Left Turn
144. as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 21 Glow Plug Light If Equipped TO This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than 22 F 30 C and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has no
145. ase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION sult in overheating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Tire Pressure shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Safety and Vehicle Stability Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob Economy lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure e Tread Wear Continued e Ride Comfort 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable stee
146. at seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor 5 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the sea
147. at they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level e Air is directed through the panel and floor A outlets e Floor woe Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix We Air is directed through the floor defrost and gf side window demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois ture on the windshield Defrost Hy Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pushed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Rear Window Defrosting Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn the function on off The activation of the function is indicated by the rear defrost warning light on the instrument panel switching on The function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes If equipped push the rear defrost button to activate defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window NOTE Do not
148. ater limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle e Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water e Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects ELECTRIC POWER STEERING e Driving through standing water may cause damage This only operates with the key turned to MAR ON and to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always the engine started The steering allows the force required inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans at the steering wheel to be adjusted to suit driving mission axle etc
149. ation Pressures 283 W TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 284 ee ong aa Radial Ply Tires sss 284 M a a id Tite Types eee eee 285 General Information 00 302 Run Flat Tires If Equipped ss 287 ll FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1 4L Turbo 302 Spare Tires If Equipped 287 Beroumulated sasoie Tire Spinning cccecccareieseravses 290 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 303 Tread Wear Indicators 0 290 MINIT e deis cgradr stint 9M Life Of Tire LLL 291 Materials Added To Fuel sss 304 Replacement Tires iusso E bs 292 Buel yoo CAMs eter ibaa atydalgotend eds oe lI TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 294 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 305 ll TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 295 228 STARTING AND OPERATING ME B ADDING FUEL 00005 306 Hi RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND B TRAILER TOWING 308 ROA ent ancn nea ine at eneey au Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 309 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 229 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or
150. ation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi cle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 054901778 Example Tire Placard Location Door Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos e SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE PI9S7ORT4 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIRE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 Tire And Loading Information Placard 811b5a9a STARTING AND OPERATING 277 This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pre
151. bar switch to adjust the lumbar support Release the switch when you reach the desired position Power Lumbar Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Heated Seats If Equipped NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt On some models the front driver and passenger seats NORTURCONELOHTING a may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The controls for the front heated seats are WARNING located on the outer side of the seat Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat Heated Seat Switch 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Seats While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the desired position is reached Then using body pressure The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
152. be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions 242 STARTING AND OPERATING ME To maximize fuel economy the Euro Twin Clutch Six Speed Transmission uses a geartrain arrangement similar to a manual transmission Therefore you should become familiar with some of the normal operational character istics of this transmission e During low speed driving conditions in first gear vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in response to changes in accelerator pedal position This behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped with a manual transmission At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar to a manual transmission as the transmission changes gears These noises are normal and will not damage the transmission Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch odor similar to a manual transmission An active warning message will display in the Instrument Clus ter if cool down actions are needed When stopped on an incline always use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place On steep inclines Hill Start Assist HSA will temporarily hold the car in position when the brake pedal is released If the accelerator pedal is not applied after a short time the car will roll b
153. brightness level Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing settings Hill Start Assist This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the foot has been removed from the brake pedal Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off Off will flash on the display according to previous setting Push and release the UP A or DOWN v button for setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Exit Menu This function closes the initial menu screen Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the main screen Push and release the AA button to return to the first menu option Speed Beep Push and release the V button to return to the last menu option Daylights Uconnect amp RADIOS For detailed information about your Uconnect radio refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual iPod USB MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the AUX Jack or USB port UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 USB AUX Ports 1 USB Con
154. c Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop 256 STARTING AND OPERATING EEEEEEEEEEEEEARMAMAAMAMMMEEEEEE DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water consider the following Cautions safety and prevent damage to your vehicle and Warnings before doing so Flowing Rising Water WARNING WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing w
155. c feature ON OFF The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 12 AUTO Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Description The automatic dual zone climate control system regulates the air temperatures in the passenger compartment in two zones driver side and passenger side es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 The system maintains comfort inside the passenger com partment and compensates for possible variations in external climate conditions The climate control system can recognize extremely cold or extremely hot conditions in the passenger compart ment and consequently provide optimal management of the system s capabilities NOTE The reference temperature is 72 F 22 C for optimal comfort management The automatically controlled parameters and functions are air temperature at the driver front passenger side vents e fan speed continuous variation of the air flow compressor engagement for cooling dehumidifying the air e air recirculation All these functions can be adjusted manually by operat ing the system selecting one
156. ce Kit Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h WARNING Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you permanent damage to the kit 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sa E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit before continuing 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Air Mode position Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 Bar or higher 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inf
157. cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 159 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pres sure value 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION CAUTION Continued The TPMS has been optimized for the original After inspecting or adjusting the tire pr equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and always reinstall the valve stem eap This will warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size NOTE prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care cause the Tire Pressure Monitori
158. correspond The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of mnie each JUS a Di TOUREPOR RP back of thie cover the engine compartment next to the battery To access the fuses press the release tabs and remove the cover Front Distribution Unit ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F01 60 Amp Blue i Body Controller F02 60 Amp Blue Body Controller Rear Distribution Unit F03 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Switch F04 40 Amp Orange Anti Lock Brake Pump F05 70 Amp Tan Electric Power Steering F06 30 Amp Green Radiator Fan Low Speed F07 50 Amp Red Radiator Fan High Speed F08 40 Amp Orange Blower Motor F09 7 5 Amp Brown Transmission F10 15 Amp Blue Horn F11 10 Amp Red Powertrain F14 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 115V F15 15 Amp Blue Transmission F16 7 5 Amp Brown Transmission Powertrain F17 10 Amp Red Powertrain 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F18 5 Amp Tan Powertrain Multiair If Equipped F19 7 5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning F20 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster F21 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump F23 20 Amp Yellow Anti Lock Brake Valves F24 i 7 5 Amp Brown Stability Control System F30 5 Amp Tan After Run Pump F81 70 Amp Tan PTC Secondary F82 40 Amp Orange Transmission F83 40 Amp Orange PTC Primary F84
159. ction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously ESC The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially OFF off ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted Refer to Partial Off for additional information Partial Off The ESC OFF button is located in the switch bank above the climate control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the STARTING AND OPERATING 267 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illu minate To turn the ESC on again momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will turn off This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation uU o O ESC Off Switch 268 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button Onc
160. d release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Computer The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster It features a driver interactive display displays informa tion such as trip information range fuel consumption average speed and travel time Trip Button The TRIP button located on the right steering column stalk can be used to display and to reset the previously described values MN I a RN AN I A e Ashort button push displays the different values e Along button push resets the system and then starts a new trip ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 New Trip To reset e Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system manually When the Trip distance reaches 9999 9 miles or kilometers or when the Travel time reaches 999 59 99 hours and 59 minutes the system is reset auto matically e Disconnecting Reconnecting the battery resets the system NOTE If t
161. d for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Vehicle damage may occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Dam age to your vehicle may result from improper towing If you must use the accessories wipers defroster etc while being towed the key must be in the ON RUN position Manual Transmission e Vehicle can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground ments can cause severe engine and or transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not cov ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Euro Twin Clutch Transmission e Vehicle can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground If the ignition key is unavailable or th
162. d properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events WARNING e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs The trim covering above the side win dows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstruc tions Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs In order for the SABICS to work as intended do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The SABICs and SABs Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC de termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate based on the severity and type of collision Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
163. detent The wipers will operate at intermittent speed Low Speed Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent The wipers will operate at low speed High Speed c Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent The wipers will operate at high speed Manual High Speed Mist Push the lever upward from the off position The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle This operation will continue until the lever is released When the lever is released the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off Front Windshield Washer Operation Pull the windshield wiper washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi tion before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Front Windshield Washer Operation Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from re
164. driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unau thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned to the ON RUN position it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION e Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle
165. e tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not the strap after it is attached to the anchorage all child restraint systems will be installed as described Center Seat LATCH here To Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint WARNING If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto e Do not install a child restraint in the center posi Matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat tion using the LATCH system This position is not belt following the instructions below See the section approved for installing child seats using the Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt LATCH attachments You must use the seat belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center m 1 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the seating position tether strap of the child seat so that you can more Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle than one child restraint Please refer to Installing anchorages The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 2 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for th
166. e key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF LOCK to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 20 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light i Fach tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
167. e should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 732 8243 e Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana da s website for additional information http www tc gc ca eng motorvehiclesafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Toddlers younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear height or weight limits of their child seat of the vehicle restraint Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward Facing Child Restrain
168. e side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space with a rear seat between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured Seat Belt Systems 9 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even modified to accommodate a disabled person contact On short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided and could cause a collision that includes you This can under If You Need Consumer Assistance happen far away from home or on your own street ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert Driver and Passenger BeltAlert amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front seat passenger BeltAlert to buckle their seat belts The Belt Alert feature is active when ever the ignition switch is in the AVV START or MAR RUN position Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the AVV START or MAR RU
169. e Compartments 6 162 TD Opin oa cosn qae as ga iu RR e e 148 M REAR WINDOW FEATURES 162 To 1088 4 eps aed hls e ra Y Es 148 Rear Window Defroster 162 Wi d Buffeting cese cer Gas wach sete os 149 M ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED 163 Power Sun Blind ysis sensas saarensa is 149 B POWER OUTLETS sees 150 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror HEEECCCC UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror
170. e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position e 9 Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es What is the weight limit child s weight 4 weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower an chorages No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to in stall a child seat in the center seating position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to in stall a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchor ag
171. e Marker Lamps LED See Authorized dealer Rear Tail Stop Lamps P21 5W Rear Tail Lamp LED See Authorized dealer Rear Turn Signal Lamps P21W Rear Backup Lamps W16W Rear Side Marker Lamps LED See Authorized dealer Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED See Authorized dealer Front Fog Lamps H11 Rear Fog Lamps If Equipped W16W 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Bulb Number W5W License Plate Lamps NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 1 Remove the plastic sealing cap from the back of the headlamp housing by turning it counter clockwise Headlamp Sealing Cap Removal MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 2 Rotate the bulb counter clockwise 4 Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb Bulb Removal Procedure Electrical Connector Removal 3 Remove the bulb when all the tabs are aligned with the openings in the metal holder 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Install the new bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in 6 Reinstall the plastic
172. e conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M EVIC Screen The EVIC will display the following ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster The EVIC consists of the following e System Status Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions Time Date or trip distance display in miles or kilometers Outside temperature Gear Indicator Odometer display of distance travelled in miles kilometers Car status indication e g doors open possible ice on road service etc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 EVIC Control Buttons The EVIC control buttons are located on the instrument panel below the radio Push and release the MENU but
173. e could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the transmission is Continued WARNING Continued locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the
174. e during operation which is normal The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light When the light is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary WARNING Pumping the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued WARNING Continued The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a WARNING pulsing sensation Yo
175. e exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer ry Defroster Check operation by selecting the def
176. e locking the vehicle through the RKE internal button or external key pawl also if one or more doors are open At lock command request LED is switched ON At closing of the last door the vehicle maintains the central locking status if key is not inserted in Ignition Device otherwise the vehicle will be unlocked and the LED will be switched OFF NOTE If the key is not inserted in the ignition switch but is inside the vehicle the system does not recognize the presence of the key and after the closing of last door the vehicle remains locked Auto Relocking Only For Rear Doors With the vehicle locked and all doors closed LED ON if a passenger opens one of the rear doors LED OFF as soon as the door is closed it will be locked again LED ON Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the key into the lock and rotate clockwise to the LOCK position or counter clockwise to UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 WARNING POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened The power window contr
177. e normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off immediately and call for service WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench Torque Specifications Steel Wheels Only 89 Ft Lbs 120 N m Aluminum Wheels Only Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size 63 Ft Lbs 86 N m M12 x 125 17 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be nut bolt has been tightened twice sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated against the wheel WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 0605006372 Torque Patterns WHAT TO DO I
178. e on position and stays on after you start the Controller ORC may also be disabled In this condition vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi tion Have an authorized dealer service the air bag ately system immediately 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xs Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per so
179. e recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather Liftgate Emergency Release As a security measure a Liftgate Emergency Release is built into the liftgate latching mechanism To access the Liftgate Emergency Release proceed as follows 1 Remove the rear headrests and fold down the seats completely 2 Take the screwdriver from the tool box supplied 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 3 With the screwdriver remove the tab of yellow 4 Introduce the screwdriver into the seat B in order to color A trigger the release tab of the trunk follow the direction arrow to open Yellow Tab Location Release Tab OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Seat Belt Systems e Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Air Bags Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat eS O1 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
180. e speed these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal selected and the clutch pedal is released Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal 1 Meld pressed Wey not released NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to second or first when descending a steep grade When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade down shift early so that the engine will not be overburdened ee STARTING AND OPERATING 235 WARNING e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle c
181. e the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Par tial Off mode the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles STARTING AND OPERATING 269 WARNING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that
182. e vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 CAUTION CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re e DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a conventional automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty round Automatic Transmission Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty the ground e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated If the ignition key is unavailable or the battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE 5 Using the Allen key undo the lower steering column This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter cover screws and remove the lower cover lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to
183. ear 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Push and release the SET ESC button briefly to return to the submenu screen or hold the button down to return to the main menu screen without saving Buzzer Volume Adjusting The Failure Warning Buzzer Volume With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany ing any failure warning indication can be adjusted to one of eight volume levels To adjust the volume proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button The pre viously set volume level will flash on the display 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Speed Buzzer Speed Limit With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit mph or km h when this limit is exceeded the driver is immediately alerted To set the speed limit proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button The dis play will show the message Speed Beep 2 Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button to select speed limit activation On or deactivation Off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 3 When the function is activated On briefly push and release the MENU button to display the presently set activation speed Pushing the UP or DOWN buttons selects the speed limit
184. ect 5 0 Media 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Phone Making and answering hands free phone calls is easy with Uconnect When the Phonebook button is illumi nated on your touchscreen your system is ready Check UconnectPhone com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions Push the Phone button w After the beep say one of the following commands Call John Smith e Dial 123 456 7890 and follow the system prompts Redial call previous outgoing phone number Call back call previous incoming phone number TIP When providing a Voice Command push the Phone button w and say Call then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book When a contact has multiple phone numbers you can say Call John Smith work 10 10 ROAM uil Nokia 9211 ana Redial Phone Ready AR pores sd Settings Uconnect 5 0 Phone EEE I UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Navigation 6 5A 6 5AN t 10 10 er Jeremy pt Buddy s Mom s Cell Desk The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time Feinstein Pizza and become more productive when you know exactly E Bob s Phone Of i e how to get to where you want to go Redial 1 Toenter a destination push the VR button vr After Phone Ready d the beep say m e For the 6 5AN Uconnect System say Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills Michigan 2 Then follow the system prompts
185. ed into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT E STARTING AND OPERATING 271 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Example Size Designation P215 65R15XL 95H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31x10 5 R15 LT P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards or blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards or LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards or T or Temporary spare tire or 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 235 145 Section width in millimeters mm 65 85 80 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire or 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction or D means diagonal or bias construction 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE 15 16 18 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure
186. ehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued 204 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES CAUTION Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body e a f clearance Follow these recommendations to guard iier amage to your vehicle or tires observe ine against damage ollowing precautions Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires
187. emperature llle 169 F el ud acto EE PARES a La es 169 Odometer llle 169 Tachometer z 2 23 2934 den ddim Gee s 169 Gear Ranges siccus sos seseque ede S ess 238 248 Gear Select Lever Override iss 342 General Information llle 302 General Maintenance 00005 169 353 Glass Cleaning niemes do cie Ra a doa Oo s 387 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Wales sissa cerem tena eae i e i 256 Headlights x uat me RR a e DeC Rn 113 Cleaning ese e S aem ice CEU dde a 387 High Beam edere ck ke e RUE S Por 169 PASSING gg aerae unma aoe vae 114 Heated Mirrors leen 96 Hill Start Assist 22s 446p Rr RARI 98545404 263 Holder Cup ciem ere RR eR es 152 HomeLink Garage Door Opener 138 Hood Release llle 110 Ignition Keyi a outre ed oae eerte teg eng a TAY e d aa n e A 11 Immobilizer Sentry Key 04 4 13 Information Center Vehicle 0 180 Inside Rearview Mirror lere 92 Instrument Cluster dananum ra naa eens 169 Instrument Panel and Controls 167 Instrument Panel Cover 000000 ee 387 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 388 Interior Appearance Care 000 0005 385 Interior Lighting sev x se rp eS 116 ee INDEX 431 Introduction xe ie rm ERE eR R3 4 Jacking Instructions 2 2 6 0 0 0 00 00000 331 Jack Location s Se RR we
188. enter position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery Interior Light Timing Center Position There are four different modes of operation that can be activated in this position When one door is opened a three minute timer is activated When the key is removed from the ignition within two minutes of the ignition being turned off a 10 second timer is activated Map Reading Light Switches ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 e When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off Interior Light Timing On Right Position e When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated NOTE The timer is deactivated when the key is moved into the ON RUN position WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column NOTE The windshield wipers washers will only oper ate with the ignition in the ON RUN position Front Windshield Wiper Operation There are five different modes of operation for the front windshield wipers The windshield wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access these modes Windshield Wiper Lever 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Off O This is the normal position of the wiper lever Intermittent Speed aD Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
189. er is currently blocked This occurs if REVERSE is requested while moving at 6 mph 10 km h or faster or if DRIVE is requested while moving backwards at 6 mph 10 km h or faster Make sure the vehicle is stopped before engaging DRIVE or REVERSE SHIFT TO NEUTRAL THEN The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL due to a fault condi DRIVE OR REVERSE tion or overheat due to excessive idling when stopped in DRIVE with the brakes released but the shift lever remains in gear Shift into NEU TRAL and then back into gear for continued driving If the transmission will not re engage see your authorized dealer 244 STARTING AND OPERATING ME MESSAGE DESCRIPTION AUTOMATIC UNAVAILABLE The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically due to a fault condition Use the AutoStick mode to shift the transmission manually See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service REDUCE GEAR CHANGES The transmission pump is overheating In AutoStick mode try to drive in one specific gear as much as possible avoiding frequent gear changes In DRIVE the transmission will automatically modify its shift schedule to reduce the number of shifts TRANSMISSION GETTING HOT The transmission driving clutch is overheating usually due to repeated PRESS BRAKE launches in stop and go traffic Pull over and allow the transmission to cool in NEUTRAL until TRANS COOL READY TO DRIVE is displayed TRANS HOT STOP SAFELY
190. ermits a level load threshold to facilitate loading unloading of ob jects in the luggage compartment It also allows the space underneath to be used as a additional compart ment for stowing objects which are more fragile or small Front Center Armrest Raised Position 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Position 3 platform completely raised in conjunction with the lowering of the rear seat and front passenger side seat backrests permits long objects to be loaded It is advisable to use this position only for the actual period in which the objects are transported then return the platform to position 1 or 2 Tilt of cargo floor The cargo floor can also be arranged at an angle tilted toward the rear seat backs in order to facilitate access to the area below the luggage compartment In this position also the plan guarantees the correct locking of any objects present inside the cargo area avoiding that they move in the event of sudden braking UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 CAUTION The dimension of the cargo floor permit a maximum capacity of a distributed weight of 154 Ibs 70kg Gif positioned at threshold level or 88 Ibs 40 kg if positioned at raised level do not add objects with a higher weight Access to double load compartment To access the double load compartment proceed as follows 1 Grip handle and raise platform holding it with one Load Platform hand 1
191. es in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed Yes All may be removed 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion LATCH Lower Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages At There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat near the floor Upper Tether Anchorages THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Tether Anchorage Routing Position LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing child restraints will also be equipped with a 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE S
192. etting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed push the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANC button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 To
193. f the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 302 STARTING AND OPERATING General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A CAWAMAA Single FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1 4L Turbo RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATIO mans MC TMOG This engine is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 91 9990259 ine with a minimum octane rating of 87 For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline c
194. fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock ing ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Depress the brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK 230 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the AVV ACC START position and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the STOP OFF LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Cold Weather Operation To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than 22
195. fe of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios DOOR LOCKS Push the central LOCK UNLOCK button located on the instrument panel in the switch bank below the radio The button has an LED that indicates whether the doors are locked or unlocked LED ON Doors locked Pushing the central LOCK UNLOCK button once will unlock all doors The LED will switch off once the doors are unlocked LED OFF doors unlocked Pushing the central LOCK UNLOCK button once will lock all doors The LED will switch on once the doors are locked 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE With central locking active LED ON opening one of the front doors it is possible to perform a central unlocking LED OFF With central locking active LED ON in order to open one of the rear passenger doors it is necessary pulling the internal door handle twice With one of the rear door open LED OFF the unlocking is performed only for that door not for all the vehicle To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent If the rear doors are locked you must pull the door handle once to unlock the door and pull the door handle a second time to open the door Central LOCK UNLOCK Button Once the doors have been locked with the RKE transmit ter it will no longer be possible to unlock them by pres
196. fill the vehicle For more information on the Cap Less Fuel System refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating in this manual MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 351 E ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 352 E REPLACEMENT PARIS 00 352 E DEALER SERVICE 0000000 353 Bl MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 353 Engine Oll i oso oe RELEASE ET DR dei 354 Engine OIL Filter Ros eae wes 356 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 356 O Maintenance Free Battery 357 Air Conditioner Maintenance ss 358 Body Lubrication 0000 362 Wiper Blades i22 ee BER 363 Adding Washer Fluid suus 366 Exhaust System Cooling System Brake System esse pp e Sor ES Manual Transmission If Equipped 377 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission It Equipped i secre ee 378 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Automatic Transmission Aisin F21 250 HD Transmission If Equipped 380 Appearance Care And Protection From CORPOSIOR cues ale WR Ee doe Rees 382 a FUSES eera ade e an e eri ca 389 Underhood Fuses 0 002005 390 Interior Fuses uo vem ee RES 393 Rear Interior Fuses 2 0 0004 393 E VEHICLE STORAGE essen 394 E RE
197. front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or to help you in determining when your tires should be for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop replaced ping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode a
198. g Retractor ALR If Equipped The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR which is used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 er n WARNING the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts Allow the webbing to e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch 12 years or younger including a child in a rear plate into the buckle until you hear a click facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat In Automatic Locking Mode the shoulder belt is auto matically pre locked The seat belt will still retract to remove a
199. g a Voice Command from current category UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Basic Voice Commands ri The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system Push the VR button vr After the beep say e Cancel to stop a current voice session EB Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Uconnect amp Voice Command 1 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call Send Or Receive A Text 2 Push to MUTE 3 Push To End Call 4 Push To Begin Radio Navigation Media or Climate functions 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system s status Cues appear on the touch screen We Listening Help E Cancel iN Uconnect 5 0 uf Listening 10 10 0 Mom s Cell Jeremy T Buddy s Feinstein Pizza _ E Bob s Phone Of Redial Phone Ready Phonebook Recent Calls al Messaging Settings Uconnect 6 5A 6 5AN E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Radio 0 1 0 Use your voice to quickly get to the AM FM or SiriusXM THT TTT Tahaan Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear Sub 89 9 101 9 94 7 103 3 All scription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial Ss required FM Push the VR button vr After the beep say 1 1 9 r dd Tune to ninety five point five FM e Tune to Satellite Channel Hit
200. g capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the Brake Warning Light is on 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Main fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake taining Your Vehicle for further information fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further transmission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to information Using the wrong type of brake fluid both the brake system and the clutch release system The can severely damage your brake system and or two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in impair its performance The proper type of brake one system will not affect the other system The manual fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the transmission clutch release system should not require original f
201. g position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING Do not attach a tether strap for a rear facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat including the seat frame or a tether anchorage Only attach the Continued WARNING Continued tether strap of a rear facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position located behind the top of the vehicle seat See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH Restraint System for the location of ap proved tether anchorages in your vehicle Ww Ww 0226047162 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anc
202. gnal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released Parking Lights To turn on the parking lights remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF LOCK position and turn on the headlights D 0 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash five times then automatically turn off Follow Me Home Headlight Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time Activation Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF LOCK position and pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel within two minutes Each time the lever is pulled the activation of the lights will be extended by 30 seconds The activation of the lights can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds
203. h is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone Adding 1 quart 0 9 Liters of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 CAUTION Do not overfill the engine with oil Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled m
204. he child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of because it can loosen the child restraint attach the vehicle seat ments Remove the child restraint before adjusting Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front the vehicle seat position When the vehicle seat has of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the been adjusted reinstall the child restraint way back When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor
205. he reset operation occurs in the presence of the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B only the infor mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset Start Of Trip Procedure With the ignition on push and hold the TRIP button for over one second to reset Exit Trip To exit the Trip function wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than one second Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing settings 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Trip Functions Both trip functions are resettable reset start of new trip Trip A can be used to display the figures relating to e Range Trip distance A e Average Economy A Instant Economy Average speed A Travel time A driving time Trip B can be used to display the figures relating to Trip distance B Average Economy B e Average speed B Travel time B driving time NOTE Trip B functions may be excluded see Trip B Data Range and Instantaneous consumption can not be reset Values Displayed Range This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank assuming that driving conditions will not change The message will appear on the display in the following cases e Distance less than 30 miles or 50
206. he window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window LIFTGATE To unlock the liftgate use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or activate the central locking button located on the instrument panel below the radio To open the liftgate push the liftgate electronic release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use th
207. hicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity The range of additional services available to FCA US LLC customers NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained techni cians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfaction ee INTRODUCTION 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section iT contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION QQoX DesdeoecouS amp ocboesde0 o0 2OS
208. horage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting 4 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be res
209. horized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat ing speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than a 1 4 of an inch 6 mm Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Symbol Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons Spring Summer Fall and Winter Traction levels may vary between different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M
210. ice deactivates automatically By pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmit ter e By turning the ignition key to the MAR position 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key Release Button NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key in Things To Know Before Starting for further information If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Request For Additional Remo
211. id becomes contaminated with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with such
212. ies in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of the seat belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Contin
213. ight should illuminate for approximately two seconds The light should then turn es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 6 Rear Defrost Light This indicator will illuminate when the rear win dow defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes 7 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gallon 7 6L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 8 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position the digital scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank NOTE The fuel gauge and range will not immediately update accurately when refueling with the engine on 9 Turn Signal Indicators gt 10 Temperature Gauge The arrows will flash in unison with the exte rior turn signal when using the turn signal lever The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The gauge pointe
214. ils the entire system must be disabled The system is turned off automatically es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths In washing stations clean sensors quickly keeping the va por jet high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in 10 cm from the sensors Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could damage the sensors Park Assist System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The Rear Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor prob
215. ine Oil will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 23 Fuel Door Location Reminder The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the right side of the vehicle 24 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light y This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 25 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However th
216. ing brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Although the pump is rubber mounted for quiet opera tion it is normal to hear it running during this time 8191bf86 Shift Pattern Six Speed Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third STARTING AND OPERATING 233 For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations sixth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch To shift into REVERSE pull up on the ring just below the gear shift knob and then move into the REVERSE R position Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transmission lu bricant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transmis sion 234 STARTING AND OPERATING M Downshifting AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life CAUTION J 4 CAUTION If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicl
217. ing in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis motion connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature vehicle controlled and can start at any time the ignition Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires SIR IS ae CUN pasion disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions You or
218. ion scere e rg cem Uy cee ae ids 253 226 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ll DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration uoce ek b erem e TRACTION sapra acide dob P usdoa devis ll DRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing Rising Water 000 Shallow Standing Water E ELECTRIC POWER STEERING E PARKING BRAKE 000000 E BRAKE SYSTEM sesseeeeen ll ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control System TCS 260 Hill Start Assist HSA 00 263 Dynamic Steering Torque DST 264 Electronic Stability Control ESC 265 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light 266 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 268 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 269 Tire Markings 269 Tire Identification Number TIN 273 Tire Terminology And Definitions 275 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 276 TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 281 Tire Pressure leen 281 E STARTING AND OPERATING 227 Tire Infl
219. ion before placing the ignition in the STOP OFF position Service mode must be activated within two minutes after the ignition is placed in the STOP OFF position 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To have a correct activation of strategy the Service Position command antipanic must be active for at least half a second At every valid activation of Service Position command the wiper blades are activated for 250 ms The Service Position command can be repeated several times to bring the blades into the desired position up to a maximum of three times After three subsequent activations the strategy is dis abled Function Deactivation The functionality is reset if Turn the ignition to the MAR RUN position e Number of subsequent activations is three Two minutes timer has expired after turning the ignition OFF NOTE When turning the ignition ON the blades will go into the parking position Front Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the windshield 2 Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade 3 Push the wiper blade up the and remove it 1 Wiper Blade 2 Release Button 3 Wiper Arm 4 Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into place MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the lif
220. ith Reactive Head Restraints In the event of a rear impact the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the Reactive Head Restraint To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint push the adjust ment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint To remove the head restraint raise it as far as it can go then push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up To reinstall the head restraint put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward Then adjust it to the appropriate height 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside o the occupant compartment ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants Follow e the re installation instructions above prior to oper ating the vehicle or occupying a seat Do not place items over the top of the Active Head 1 Release Button Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable 2 Adjustment Button DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive He
221. ith Automatic or Euro Twin Clutch NOTE Push the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode transmission while gently pressing the accelerator Use before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will Control in Starting And Operating for further infor IB maintain the rocking motion without spinning the mation Once the vehicle has been freed push the ESC wheels or racing the engine Off switch again to restore ESC On mode CAUTION CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result Continued Continued 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Continued Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring WARNING Fast spinning tires
222. ither the Central Lock Unlock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 3 The horn will sound and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will switch on for approxi mately 3 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm After approximately 3 seconds the Vehicle Security Light will flash This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed The activation of the Vehicle Security Alarm is followed by a self diagnosis stage If a fault is detected during the self diagnosis stage the horn will sound a second time If the horn sounds a second time check that all doors hood and liftgate are closed correctly then rearm the system 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If the Vehicle Security Alarm sounds the horn a second time even when all doors hood and liftgate are correctly closed a fault has occurred in the operation of the system Contact your authorized dealer To Disarm The System Push UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter or insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not disarm when the metal insert of the key is used on a single door lock cylinder The Vehicle Security A
223. jury A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be re placed immediately Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat and next to your arm in the rear seat for vehicles equipped with a rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight
224. key The spare tire is stowed in underneath the rear cargo area 5 Emergency Spare Tire Bag on the outside of the car 6 Emergency Screwdriver 1 Remove the cargo floor to access the winch 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 Remove the jack handle and use the wrench end to Preparations For Jacking lower the spare tire 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or 3 When the spare is clear replace the jack tools slippery areas E QS Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 3 Set the parking brake Winch Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 4 Place the shift lever in PARK Euro Twin Clutch Jacking Instructions Transmission or REVERSE manual transmission 5 Turn Off the ignition WARNING 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to opposite of the jacking position For help prevent personal injury or damage to your example if changing the right front vehicle tire block the left rear wheel e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set
225. l engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 as soon as possible ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Cooling System Pressure Cap WARNING Continued The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine Do not use a pressure cap other than the one coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Do not open hot engine cooling system Never add engine coolant
226. larm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs push the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Central Lock Unlock Switch Safe Lock Device If Equipped This safety device prevents the operation of the interior door handles and the door locking unlocking button It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the passenger compartment serving as an obstacle to break in attempts e g broken window THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock device Activating The Safe Lock Device each time you park your car Safe Lock Device Location The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors by quickly double pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter The direction indicators flash three times and the LED above the button flashes to indicate that the Safe Lock device has been activated If one or more of the doors are not closed correctly the Safe Lock device will not acti vate preventing a person from getting stuck inside the passenger compartment by entering the car through and then closing the open door Deactivating The Safe Lock Device The Safe Lock dev
227. lation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 5 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement T 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle Push the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Push the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place
228. leaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with Continued 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING Continued an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative c
229. led Express Open NOTE During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof To Close With the sunroof in the full open position pull and hold the power sunroof switch for approximately one second NOTE During Express close any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Power Sun Blind Pull the power sun blind switch and the blind will move towards the rear part of the car until it is fully open With the blind fully open pull the power sun blind switch and the blind will move towards the front part of the car until it is fully closed NOTE During the automatic opening and closing stages if the power sun blind switch is pulled again it will stop the blind movement 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER OUTLETS Passenger Compartment Power Socket
230. lem causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Before using ParkSenseG it is strongly recom mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors Continued
231. ler for replacement 6 Separate the backplate from the tail lamp housing 7 Remove the tail stop or turn signal bulbs by pushing them slightly and turning counter clockwise FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 13 1 Gallons 50 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 1 4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3 8 Liters Cooling System 1 4 Liter Turbo Engine MOPAR 6 1 Quarts 5 8 Liters Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula n 5 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 90032 Engine Oil 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W 40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12991 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 1 4L Turbo Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 91 Octane Recommended 0 15 Ethanol 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Mixing of engine c
232. less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your aut
233. lle 418 414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se E DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION Traction Grades 0 eee ee eee 421 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES 420 Tieadwe at sm oda poeta wo a alate amp ana 421 Temperature Grades 0000 421 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally inte
234. luid and Filter Changes liess 382 Fluid Change 252i Rb ERE RE n 382 Fluid Level Cheek ss presta ec ete eia 381 Fluid Type i tue aang oie Bah RR ed 403 Gear R ng s xuceders e dere RR dcs 248 Special Additives 22i ee RS 381 AULOSHCK i ccepit pepe rite een 253 Auto Up Power Windows llle 27 Battery s sack sese Ee oan Ga od eas doses 357 Jump Starting scs iion rn 336 Belts Seat 24 0 9 4a Rec Re Y Wa RAN XE cR Ed 85 Body Mechanism Lubrication 362 B Pillar Eocati n 22s m emm nm 276 Brake Assist System less 262 Brake Fluid ius o ame ep teda 403 Brake Parking cete sra e ex Sed 258 Brakes ge gaus ementi Ee uci eit Mae Gt ain 375 Brake System siecle ber bey 260 375 Anti Lock ABS 0 0 0 aaraa aana eee 260 Master Cylinder 452icec3sb4ieeddpe bbe 375 Parking y a ee whey hehe eer e Re Dios 258 Warming Light nasce RR soda PER bs us 169 Brake Transmission Interlock 0 0 236 Bulb Replacement s sers steri seos perinei 394 396 Bulbs Light sas nn 87 394 Camera Rear 2 135 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 400 Capacities Fluid 2 6 llle 400 Caps Filler Fuels aua RE omes RR ok ba e ae 347 Qil Engirie Lisez RR Re HEH Bas 355 Carbon Monoxide Warning lle 84 305 Car Washes i edo ie ERSTE ane ea a eae SURE 383 Cellular Phone lt 4 eter borde eve 194 Center High Mounted Stop Light
235. m a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while you push and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency sig
236. m in this position before proceeding Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and place the ignition in the OFF position 4 Set the parking brake 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Sealant Mode position Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 C Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pushing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure
237. n 2015 FCA US LLC All rights reserved Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC Android is a trademark of Google Inc SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc Uconnect System Support e U S residents call DriveUconnect com Canadian residents call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French or visit DriveUconnect ca Mon Fri 7 00 am 12 00 am ET Sat 8 00 am 10 00 pm ET Sun 9 00 am 5 00 pm ET 1 877 855 8400 or visit STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Bl STARTING PROCEDURES 229 Downshifting 0 0 0 0 0000000 234 Manual Transmission If Equipped 220 l AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission If Equipped 229 PERN FD CER SSUR RS age yee eae REI TES Normal Starting cde E rens 230 Aea omaan Rank Iino gue ai pina Cold Weather Operation s s 230 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 236 Extended Park Starting 0 230 due i e d Dd n u 6 If Engine Fails To Start 231 Six Speed Automatic Transmission After Starting 6 6 0 eee eee 232 Aisin F21 250 HD If Equipped 246 O Turbo Charger Cool Down 232 W AUTOSTICK ici cR RR 253 ll MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 232 Operat
238. n the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis sion 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 inch 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Please see your authorized dealer for service Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Euro Twin Clutch Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used ee M
239. n cause serious injury or death Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for safety information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 2 This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The sunroof has two glass panels the front one is operational and the re
240. n repeat the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing the procedure serious personal injury CAUTION CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not continuously e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with a Euro Twin Clutch Transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle To prevent damage to the starter do not continu ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again 232 STARTING AND OPERATING ME After Starting MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will NE 0 0 11 decrease as the engine warms up WARNING Turbo Charger Cool Down You or others could be injured if you leave the hicl ttended without having th ki This vehicle is equipped with an after run pump to cool i ri the turbocharger after the engine is shut off Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal brake fully applied The park
241. n to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for with a clean dry towel leather upholstery Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt EUN can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery Direct contact of air fresheners insect repellents and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth suntan lotions or hand sanitizers to the plastic Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth painted or decorated surfaces of the interior may and MOPARQ Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid cause permanent damage Wipe away immediately soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids
242. nal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Canadian Gate Operator To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Using HomeLink amp To operate switch the ignition to the ON RUN position and the press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will
243. nal instrument panel con appears on display Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC where provided 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M While audible signals are emitted the audio system is not muted The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant If this condition occurs for the external sensors the signal is turned off after 3 seconds stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls Failure Indications A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is indicated during REVERSE gear engagement by the instrument panel warning icon and message displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC display The warning icon is illuminated and a message is displayed on the EVIC display if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the ignition is in the ON RUN position Failures are indi cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor is in failure condition the EVIC shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable without reference to the sensor in failure condition If even a single sensor fa
244. nal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be pros ecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so Continued WARNING Continued great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicl
245. nd injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 055007576 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1 16 of an inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replace ment e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismou
246. ndition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following sce narios Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals e Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings e Using tire chains on the vehicle e Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 NOTE Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly e e The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place o
247. ne or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator Continued 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of FCA Ma terial Standard MS 90032 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe interna
248. nector 2 AUX Cable Jack Refer to the Uconnect 5 0 6 5 User s Manual for iPod and external USB support capability 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located at the rear of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches w P d 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT AUX Media Player etc and can also be used to select enter an item while scrolling through menu The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you
249. ng System TPMS and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire sensor to become inoperable After using an after failure or condition market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes Base System the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire i tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim MD E tU mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain gj Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger Module illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
250. nge oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4 000 miles 6 500 km if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip e e e Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder reservoir and fill as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System Change
251. ngine does not start before the starting operation can be repeated e Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and re move the Key Fob from the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death 1 STOP OFF LOCK 3 AVV START 2 MAR ACC ON RUN E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the left To unlock the door turn the key to the right Refer to Body Lubrication in Main taining Your Vehicle for maintenance procedures Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the
252. nic Vehicle Information Center EVIC E iPod9 USB MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL 191 a Sede setedtisppoqe itid ipaa 182 Wi STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 192 Change Engine Oil Indicator System 183 Radio Op ration sansa eite Sp ders 193 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Player Op ration ciem e 193 Get Started is acera ES ee de x Rn es 214 B CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 4 nnm 193 Basic Voice Commands i060 200 srs 4008 215 ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 194 Radi Paes wean Xn 217 B CLIMATE CONTROLS i oiu eave ha 194 DID P ede 218 Manual Climate Control System 194 PHONG 4 2 ctp x IDA PEDES 220 Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System Navigation 65A 65AN lessen 221 a aspettare estan diei am Voice Text Reply isses 22 m DU De m E 213 Additional Information 223 Introducing Uconnect a aaan anaana 213 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Side Vent 7 Fixed Upper Air Vent 13 Climate Controls 2 Steering Wheel Audio Control 8 Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag 14 USB Port SD Card AUX Socket Located On Back Side Of Steering Wheel 3 Multifunction Lever Light Control 9 Upper Glove Compartment 15 Uconnect Audio System 4 Instrument Cluster And W
253. now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time If the ignition is switched to the OFF position HomeLink will remain active for three minutes During this time if the vehicle is locked HomeLink is disabled Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter e Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for information or assistance 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas ca
254. nstalled at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle However if the vehicle is used for police fleet taxi etc change the fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule In addition change the fluid if it becomes contaminated with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason Automatic Transmission Aisin F21 250 HD Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore d
255. nted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline 202 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your v
256. ny slack in the shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode WARNING 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR fea the entire seat belt is extracted ture or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the proce dures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could 3 Allow the seat belt to retract As the seat belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode I c Nr increase the risk of injury in collisions How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats The locked mode is only used to install rear facing or forward facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sen
257. o may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare ti
258. o not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc tion visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the ve hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IEEE Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Routine fluid and filter changes are not required However change the fluid and filter if the flu
259. ols are located on the driver s from the outside when the Child Protection locks are door trim panel There is a single switch on the front engaged locked passenger door which operate the front passenger win dow and a single switch on each rear door that operates NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the the rear passenger door window The window controls Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged unlock will operate only when the ignition switch is in the the doors using the central unlock button roll down the ON RUN position window and open the door using the exterior handle 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A Driver Front Window D Driver Rear Window Switch Switch B Passenger Front Window E Passenger Rear Window Switch Switch C Window Lockout Switch NOTE The power window switches will remain active for up to three minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHIC
260. on 317 M JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE 336 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions 319 Preparations For Jump Start 337 Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit 322 Jump Starting Procedure 338 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Ss B FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 341 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission 344 WM SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 342 Automatic Transmission 0 345 WM TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 343 Bl IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE 346 Manual Transmission 0 344 W CAP LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL 347 EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may we
261. onal tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
262. onnections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat result
263. ons can cause the catalytic converter to over heat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Continued 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open Guard again
264. oolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will CAUTION Continued need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Continued mEEEEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Manual Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR C Series Manual amp Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid Euro Twin Clutch Transmission If
265. or more functions and modifying their parameters Automatic control of the functions will be suspended the system will only override the settings for safety reasons Manual selections always take priority over automatic ones and are stored until the AUTO button is pushed or the system itself intervenes for specific safety reasons The amount of air introduced into the passenger com partment is not affected by car speed it is regulated by the fan which is controlled electronically The air temperature is always automatically controlled according to the temperature set on the display except for when the system is off or in certain conditions when the compressor is not running 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The system allows the following to be set or adjusted NOTE The climate control system detects the passenger manually e e driver passenger side air temperature fan speed continuous variation air distribution to seven positions compressor enablement rapid defrosting demisting function air recirculation heated rear window system deactivation compartment temperature using a mean radiant tem perature sensor located in the interior rear view mirror and protected by a specific cover Obstructing the field of view of this sensor with any object could cause the climate control system to operate with less than optimal efficiency Switching On The Climate Control System The climate control system c
266. others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 90032 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further
267. ould injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the transmission is Continued WARNING Continued locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 236 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF key removal position The key can only be re moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once removed the transmis sion is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
268. performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position beside the Drive position it can be moved forward and rear ward This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever forward triggers a downshift and rearward an upshift The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster NOTE In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever rearward or forward except as described below The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engine over speed The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated With six speed automatic Aisin F21 250 HD trans mission you can start out from a stop in first second or third gear Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in snow or icy conditions To select second or third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop tap the shift lever rearward once or twice If a req
269. performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Climate Control System Controls Manual Temperature Control MTC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary dials an inner push knob and two push buttons 1 Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 2 Recirculation Control Push this control button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Se lect the outside air position for
270. r Access Door Open A C Air Filter Removal 6 Remove the particulate air filters from the HVAC air 7 Install the A C air filter with the air filter position inlet housing Pull the filter elements straight out of indicators pointing in the same direction as removal the housing 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 8 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ye
271. r Interface UCI 191 Contract Service 0 0 es 417 Coolant Antifreeze 0 2 lessen 400 401 Cooling System esses Eee he gaa En 369 Adding Coolant Antifreeze pasera nadane 371 ee INDEX 427 Coolant Level llle 370 374 Disposal of Used Coolant 373 Drain Flush and Refill Ln 370 INSPECHON 3 paces eee ae eee doi 374 Points to Remember 0 05 373 374 Pressure Cape ics secte Be gules PRU UA 373 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 370 Corrosion Protection 000000 eee 382 Cruise light ose exime eam RS eds 169 Cupholders 14s yeso oae equ eh ga 152 Customer Assistance llle ess 415 Data Recorder Event 000 ee eee eae 60 Daytime Running Lights 040 114 Dealer Service 0 0 0 0 cece eee 353 Deck Lid Emergency Release 29 Defroster Windshield 000 85 197 Diagnostic System Onboard 352 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission les 381 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 373 Door Locks 22 ee eta dete EEE ES 21 Door Openet Garage s scere iira RR ders 138 Downshif ng eben EE RR eda 234 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Waters suede ub eee be TG UR P s 256 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 150 Electrical Power Outlets less Electric Remote Mirrors
272. r will likely indicate a higher tempera WARNING ture when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades It should not be allowed to exceed the upper A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or limits of the normal operating range others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer CAUTION for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If all the segments of the temperature gauge are lit pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service This light warns of an overheated engine condition The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to
273. ransmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN 0000 Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Place the ignition in the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Contin
274. rd 1 Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper Z5 outboard side of the seat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 5 Seatback Recline Lever Folding Rear Seat 4 Slowly flip the entire seat forward 5 Slowly flip the entire seat rearward and firmly lock the seat into position 6 Raise the rear seatback and firmly lock the seatback into position 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Armrest If equipped To use the armrest lower it downward Armrest Cupholder Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear Folding Rear Seat Armrest ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision NOTE Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head Reactive Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped w
275. rd American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing FIAT Group Automobiles vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts 420 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capa bilities and safety tips e Call toll free at 1 800 890
276. rd vents cooler air This distribution setting is useful in spring and autumn on sunny days Up Down Arrows Air flow distributed between footwell diffusers and windshield and front side win dow defrosting diffusers This distribution setting al lows the passenger compartment to be warmed effec tively and prevents the windows from misting Up Right Arrows Air flow distribution between windshield defrosting diffusers and side and central dashboard vents This allows air to be sent to the windshield in conditions of strong sunlight es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 e Up Right Down Arrows Air flow distribution to all diffusers on the car NOTE Air always flows from the side dashboard diffus ers it is however possible to interrupt the air flow by operating the wheel located near the corresponding vents In AUTO mode the climate control system automatically manages air distribution the LEDs on the Mode Control buttons are off When set manually the air distribution is indicated by the LEDs on the selected buttons switching on In combined function mode functions are enabled to gether with those already set when the relevant button is pushed If a button whose function is already active is pushed the operation is cancelled and the corresponding LED switches off To restore automatic control of the air distribution after a manual selection push the AUTO button AUTO Button When the AUTO button is p
277. re please refer to Tire Service Kit in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ME rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventi
278. reational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits the transmission controller will expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to pre vent transmission damage due to overheating During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine coolant temperature Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera ture has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is
279. reeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 e e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage Riding the brakes may also reduce brakin
280. rested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage FIAT Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 1 888 242 6342 FIAT Canada Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 1 800 465 2001 English Phone 1 800 387 9983 French
281. ring response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor mal wear patterns and reduced tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month e Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated e Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven
282. riven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended
283. rivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion When shifting into PARK press the lock button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop E STARTING AND OPERATING 241 NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should
284. rost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving
285. rown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle Always securely stow re moved head restraints in a location outside the occu pant compartment 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants Follow the re installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released to open the hood Adjustment Buttons For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the red of the instrument panel safety catch lever to the left and raise the hood The safety catch lever is located under the center front edge of the hood q Hood Release Lever Safety Catch Lever 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION LIGHTS Multifunction Lever To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi The multifunction lever located on the left side of the mately 6 inches 15 cm and then drop it This should steering wheel controls the operation of the headlights
286. rs do so they can be used rear facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rear facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and con vertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while t
287. ry to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags facing child restraint 2 Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag Driver Knee Impact Bolster Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment A low energy output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
288. s 1 AM SXM Tune Info Audio TIP At any time if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command press the VR button E vRand say Help The system will provide you with a list of commands Uconnect 5 0 Radio 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM 6 5 6 101 9 105 1 WUOM Morning Report Browse 4 3 Tune Ls Uconnect 6 5A 6 5AN Radio Media Uconnect offers connections via USB Port Bluetooth and Auxiliary Ports If Equipped Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod 9 devices Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles Push the VR button Av After the beep say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist Change source to Bluetooth Change source to iPodG e Change source to USB e Play artist Beethoven Play album Greatest Hits Play song Moonlight Sonata Play genre Classical UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 TIP Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of Linen of the music on your iPod or USB device Your Voice ITTPUITTWERTIPTITTTIIITTTTTTTEDTESTTPTTT Command must match exactly how the artist album Rune mU J nio P 02 here i am D iPod I Trks song and genre information is displayed Browse by Now Playing Select Source amp Artists O Albums i Genres Browse Uconnect 6 5A 6 5AN Media Uconn
289. s contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the Euro Twin Clutch i Transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to OFF Positive Terminal 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive Jump Starting Procedure battery post To remove the cover pull upward on WARNING the cover I using another vehicle to jump start the battery park Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the result in personal injury or property damage due to parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF battery explosion WARNING CAUTION Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle NOTE Before connecting the jumper cables to the dis charged battery the negative battery cable must be disconnected from the discharged battery This is the only way to successfully jump start the vehicle EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 Follow these steps to disconnect the negative battery cable 1
290. serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Seat Height Adjustment Recliner Adjustment The seat height adjustment lever is located on the out The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat board side of the seat Pull upward on the lever to raise To recline the seat lean forward slightly lift the lever lean the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seat height the seatback to its normal upright position lean forward and lift the lever Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position Height Adjustment Lever Recline Lever 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Power Lumbar If Equipped Push the power lum
291. sing central LOCK UNLOCK button E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Before exiting a vehicle always turn the vehicle OFF apply the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmis sion into REVERSE and remove the Key Fob from the ignition When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or Continued WARNING Continued others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selec tor Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open It is possibl
292. sing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFE and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued 240 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the d
293. sitive emergency locking mode es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Supplemental Restraint System SRS e Seat Belt Pretensioners Air Bag System Components e Seat Belt Buckle Switch Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag e Seat Track Position Sensors AME dal Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the Air Bag Warning Light Af driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The Instrument Panel passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air Advanced Front Air Bags bag covers Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Steering Wheel and Column e Knee Impact Bolsters e e Supplemental Side Air Bags e Supplemental Knee Air Bags e Front and Side Impact Sensors 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious inju
294. size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should deter mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups
295. solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not Damage caused by these type of products may not be required to maintain the original condition covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Do not us Alcohol and Aleoholchased and or Ketan based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas Do not
296. ssures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this manual 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and T ine th i loadi iti f E o determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 Ibs 68 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg
297. st carbon monoxide with proper main i tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every 4 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive 5 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door with all side windows fully open NOTE A funnel is provided located in the tool bag or ADDING FUEL cargo floor area in the rear cargo area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can 1 Open the fuel filler door 2 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system 3 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Funnel Location Inside Of Tool Kit Funnel Location For vehicle With Optional Spare Tire 308 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on e A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be j burned Always place fuel containers on the Sel ground while filling Emergency Fuel
298. t been used The Glow Plug light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 seconds If equipped with a block heater harness the message Plug In Engine Heater will be displayed in the instru ment cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5 F 15 C at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 22 Odometer Trip Odometer Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Display Area This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instrument cluster all warnings including door and gate and Change Eng
299. t belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seat belt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Child restraint anchorages are designed to with stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the re
300. t is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 418 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust internal combustion engines only some of its constituents and certain vehicle compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In
301. t while the vehicle is traveling the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho rized dealer FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti vating BeltAlert E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle WARNING Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injur
302. t with a who have out grown the height or weight five point Harness facing forward in the limit of their rear facing child restraint rear seat of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Larger Children Children who have out grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints of their booster seat Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Two types of child restraints can be used rear facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rear facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rear facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear facing direction than infant carrie
303. te Controls The system can recognize up to 8 remote controls Should a new remote control be necessary go to an authorized dealer taking an ID document and the car ownership documents 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote To replace the battery proceed as follows Control e Push button A to open the metal insert B e Turn the screw C to Unlock using a small screwdriver Take out the battery case D and replace the battery E making sure that polarities are correct e Refit the battery case D inside the key and lock it turning the screw C to Lock NOTE Used batteries should be properly disposed of as specified by law see your authorized dealer for assis tance needed Key Fob Components ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected li
304. ter For nose or NOTE throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air Enhanced Accident Response System bage hil note 30 place SO protect yon In the event of an impact if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending WARNING on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem perform the following functions Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the seat belt retractor e Cut off fuel to the engine assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme diately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pushed The hazard lights can be deactivated by pushing the hazard light button 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long
305. tgate glass 2 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE R Was 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder 3 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into place Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not engine coolant antifreeze Refer to Engine Compartment in this section for fur ther information WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose c
306. the LOCK OFF key removal position To remove the key manually proceed as follows Y Je 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area in 1f 7 SN the tool bag if equipped or on the left side in the cargo box MeL LV Q Lower Steering Column Screw Locations 6 Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and with the other one remove the key sliding it outwards 3 Unlock the steering column pull the tilt telescoping control handle down 4 Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of the travel position then lock the steering column in position push the control handle up until fully en gaged Release Tab Location 7 Once the key is removed reinstall the steering column cover WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 CAUTION It is advisable to contact your Authorized Dealer to have the reinstall procedure carried out If you would like to proceed in performing the reinstall procedure special attention must be paid to the correct coupling of the clips Otherwise damage to the cover or noise might be heard due to incorrect fastening of the lower cover CAP LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL The funnel for the Cap Less Fuel System is located in the rear cargo area inside the tool bag if equipped or on the left side in the cargo box If your vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed to
307. the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Push the Power Button 4 to turn On the Tire Service Kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME If the sealant white fluid does flow through the If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 4 8 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi 4 8 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure
308. ting sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 4 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses WARNING Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage Continued EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warn ings can result in injuries that are serious
309. ton briefly to access the menu and or go to next screen or to confirm the required menu option Push and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to return to the main screen Push and release the UP ZX button to scroll upward through the displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value Push and release the DOWN V button to scroll down ward through the displayed menu and the related options or to decrease the value displayed NOTE UP A and DOWN V buttons activate differ ent functions according to the following situations To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards To increase or decrease values during settings NOTE When opening one of the front doors the EVIC display will turn on the clock the external temperature and the miles or kilometers covered for versions markets where provided for a few seconds 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Setup Menu The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a cycle The menu includes the following functions e Dimmer e Speed Buzzer e First Page Buzzer Volume e e Belt Buzzer Hill Start e e Exit Menu e Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Submenu Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the main menu option to set Push and release the UP Ao DOWN V button by single pushes to select the new setting Briefly push and release the M
310. ton to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 6 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual opera tion The speeds can be selected by rotating the Blower Control adjustment knob 7 Blower Control Indicator LEDs LEDs illuminate to visually indicate blower speed 8 Mode Control The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE 9 Front Defrost Control Push and release the Front Defrost Control button to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON Perform ing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected the air conditioning compressor is switched ON LED on button ON and the air recircu lation is switched OFF LED on button OFF If the front defrost mode is turned OFF the climate system will return to the previous setting 10 Passenger Temperature Control Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Rotate adjustment knob to set desired tempera ture NOTE Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 11 SYNC Button Push the Sync button to toggle the Syn
311. toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave a manual transmis sion in REVERSE or first 1st gear Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal c
312. tractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description under Occupant Restraints for ad ditional information on ALR Lap Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Can the head restraints be removed Yes Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact All may be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating
313. traight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure 422 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 424 INDEX M Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 371 Adding Fuels oer sette ot e maps 306 Adding Washer Fluid 004 366 Additives Fuel llle 304 AIP DAG sester camer uhr hek ieee ede 45 Air Bag Advance Front Air Bag tses ditema eee 47 Air bag Operation 6 6 0 0 0 47 Air Bag
314. trained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 CAUTION WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked E vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people should
315. ts 000000 61 Transporting Pets 231 49 cc eine ten 82 ll ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 82 B SAFETY TIPS 2 0 eee 83 Transporting Passengers se etice cis ditek 83 Exhaust Gas ras cresa sr DE Snt rd bee 84 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle 2e rb DES 85 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle aaa 2 0025 asnast aad 87 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The Key Fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with an integrated key To use the mechanical key simply push the mechanical key release button Li Mechanical Key Release Button NOTE The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ignition Switch The ignition switch can be turned to three different positions STOP engine off key can be removed Some electrical devices e g sound system central door locking sys tem etc can operate NOTE In vehicles equipped with automatic transmis sions the transmission must be in PARK before the key can be removed e AVV engine start up MAR driving position All electrical devices are en abled 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN The ignition switch is fitted with a safety system that requires WARNING the ignition key to be turned back to STOP if the e
316. turn on for four seconds as a ry bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 17 Passenger Air Bag Disable PAD Light The Passenger Air Bag Disable PAD Indicator Pio Light should come on and remain on for at least four seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position If the Passenger Air Bag Disable Warning Light is flashing contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for inspection 18 Oil Pressure Warning Light RET this light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 19 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBDII that monitors engine and Euro Twin Clutch Transmis sion control systems The light will illuminate when th
317. turning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Window Wiper Washer Activation Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to operate the rear window wiper as follows e In intermittent mode when the front windshield wiper is not operating n synchronous mode at half the speed of the front window wiper when the front windshield wiper is operating In continuous mode with reverse engaged With the front windshield wipers on and reverse gear engaged rear window wiping will be continuous in the same way Rear Window Wiper Operation Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the rear window washer Keep the windshield wiper lever pushed for more than half a second to activate the rear window wiper as well Releasing the windshield wiper lever will activate the smart washing function as de scribed for the windscreen wiper UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control EE handle is located on the steering column below the turn signal lever Rear Window Washer Operation Deactivation The function stops when the windshield
318. u may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the e The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the system is functioning properly natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle Brake Assist System BAS nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those capability during emergency braking maneuvers The resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on system detects an emergency braking situation by sens very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ing the rate and amount of brake application and then The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous reduce braking distances The BAS complements the manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very the safety of others quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Traction Control System TCS The Traction Control System TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
319. ue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly push and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed 6 Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate push the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2
320. ued WARNING Continued A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body without twists If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing inter nal injuries Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect properly In a sudden stop you could move too far you from injury during a collision You are more forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not your seat belt snugly wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous are meant to be used together Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck in
321. uested downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged because the transmission will not shift automatically e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged e The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected To disengage AutoStick mode return the shift lever to the DRIVE position You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand et
322. ushed LED on button lit the climate control system automatically adjusts the follow ing settings in the corresponding zones e quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the passenger compartment e climate control system compressor and air recirculation Cancelling all previous manual adjustments This is indicated by the LED on the AUTO button switching on 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM If the AUTO button is pushed when the AUTO LED is on the system switches to completely manual mode it displays the current flow and distribution status which will no longer be managed automatically If a manual intervention is made on at least the air distribution on compressor button or on the fan speed the LED switches off to indicate that the system is no longer controlling all functions automatically NOTE Should the system no longer be able to guarantee the required temperature set in various passenger com partment zones the set temperature value will flash for a few seconds on the display To restore automatic system control after one or more manual adjustments push the AUTO button SYNC Button Push the SYNC button LED on button lit to align the passenger side air temperature with that of the driver side This function makes temperature regulation easier when the driver is travelling alone Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to set the passenger side temperature and return to separate
323. ve and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must Continued 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR ACC ON RUN position for four seconds If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu ously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ESC The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel eration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfun
324. vehicle must be responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to must continue to pay attention while backing up stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicles battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the sunvisor designate the three different HomeLink channels The HomeLink X indicator is located above the center button HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held t
325. vent may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate In the event the vehicle experiences a roll over or near rollover event and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to fric tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 irritation rinse the area with cool wa
326. ys tems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regu lations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de signed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are not quality equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional

2015 FIAT 500L Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents